These are the defined values/identifiers for SAE hash-to-element
mechanism from IEEE P802.11-REVmd/D3.0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The initial crypto wrapper implementation for wolfSSL seems to have
included a copy-paste error in crypto_bignum_sub() implementation that
was identical to crypto_bignum_add() while mp_sub() should have been
used instead of mp_add().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The logic for displaying the message about no configuration being
available for the Enrollee was reversed when support for multiple Config
Objects was added. This was supposed to be shown only if the first
Config Object fails (i.e., when no configuration is available); not when
second attempt fails (since the first one had already been successful in
that case).
Fixes: 7eb06a3369 ("DPP2: Allow multiple Config Objects to be build on Configurator")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
hostapd is by default waiting STA to send SAE Confirm before sending the
SAE Confirm. This can now be configured with sae_confirm_immediate=1
resulting in hostapd sending out SAE Confirm immediately after sending
SAE Commit.
These are the two different message sequences:
sae_confirm_immediate=0
STA->AP: SAE Commit
AP->STA: SAE Commit
STA->AP: SAE Confirm
AP->STA: SAE Confirm
STA->AP: Association Request
AP->STA: Association Response
sae_confirm_immediate=1
STA->AP: SAE Commit
AP->STA: SAE Commit
AP->STA: SAE Confirm
STA->AP: SAE Confirm
STA->AP: Association Request
AP->STA: Association Response
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add two new configuration parameters for hostapd:
enable_edmg: Enable EDMG capability for AP mode in the 60 GHz band
edmg_channel: Configure channel bonding for AP mode in the 60 GHz band
Signed-off-by: Alexei Avshalom Lazar <ailizaro@codeaurora.org>
IEEE P802.11ay defines Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) STA and
AP which allow channel bonding of 2 channels and more.
nl80211 provides the driver's EDMG capabilities from the kernel
using two new attributes:
NL80211_BAND_ATTR_EDMG_CHANNELS - bitmap field that indicates the 2.16
GHz channel(s) that are supported by the driver.
NL80211_BAND_ATTR_EDMG_BW_CONFIG - represents the channel bandwidth
configurations supported by the driver.
The driver's EDMG capabilities are stored inside struct hostapd_hw_modes.
As part of the connect request and starting AP, EDMG parameters are
passed as part of struct hostapd_freq_params.
The EDMG parameters are sent to the kernel by using two new attributes:
NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_EDMG_CHANNEL and NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_EDMG_BW_CONFIG
which specify channel and bandwidth configuration for the driver to use.
This implementation is limited to CB2 (channel bonding of 2 channels)
and the bonded channels must be adjacent.
Signed-off-by: Alexei Avshalom Lazar <ailizaro@codeaurora.org>
The new use_akm_selector=1 value to Configurator parameters can now be
used to request a list of AKM suite selectors to be used in the
Configuration Object if the Enrollee supports version 2 or newer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process all received DPP Configuration Object attributes from
Configuration Result in Enrollee STA case. If wpa_supplicant is
configured to add networks automatically, this results in one network
being added for each included Configuration Object.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Special @CONF-OBJ-SEP@ string can now be used as a DPP configuration
string value to split the string into two different components to
configure two Config Objects for an Enrollee.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit e820cf952f ("MFP: Add MFPR flag into station RSN IE if 802.11w
is mandatory") added indication of MFPR flag in non-FT cases and was
further extended to cover FT protocol in commit ded56f2faf ("FT: Fix
MFPR flag in RSNE during FT protocol"). Similar fix is needed for
FILS+FT as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows Data frames to be fully processed for the case where VLAN
tags are used on the wireless link.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Linux 2.6.32 (December 2009) introduced alternate netlink messages
for setting and installing keys, deprecating the older ones.
To allow hostapd/wpa_supplicant to use new features only provided via
the new API this patch migrates all netlink messages to the current ones.
Since the nl80211 driver was sometimes already using the new format this
is only unifying the netlink API usage and not changing the minimal
kernel requirement.
The following netlink attributes have been retired for key installs:
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_MGMT
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES
And replaced by the following attributes nested in NL80211_ATTR_KEY:
NL80211_KEY_DATA
NL80211_KEY_TYPE
NL80211_KEY_SEQ
NL80211_KEY_IDX
NL80211_KEY_CIPHER
NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT
NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_MGMT
NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES
When getting Michael MIC failure notifications or querying a key
sequence number the kernel continues to use the old attributes:
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ
NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
PTKINITNEGOTIATING in the WPA state machine calls wpa_send_eapol() and
hands over the GTK instead of the PTK keyid.
Besides a confusing debug message this does not have any negative side
effects: The variable is only set to a wrong value when using WPA2 but
then it's not used.
With this patch PTKINITNEGOTIATING sets the PTK keyid unconditionally to
zero for EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 and differentiates more obviously between GTK
and PTK keyids.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
hostapd is only interested in RTM_IEEE80211.
wpa_supplicant is only interested in RTM_IEEE80211, RTM_IFINFO and
RTM_IFANNOUNCE.
This supports the NetBSD RO_MSGFILTER interface and the alternative
DragonFlyBSD/OpenBSD interface ROUTE_MSGFILTER.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
When we set "channel=0" in hostapd.conf to enable ACS function, and set
a wrong channel list, e.g., chanlist=222-999 on purpose, hostapd would
still start ACS process to compute the ideal channel, even when there
are no available channels with such configuration.
Though there is no problem since hostapd fails to initialize interface,
it spends time going through the scan and the debug log entries may make
it more difficult to tell what was behind the failure.
Thus, check if there are any available channels in acs_request_scan(),
and return -1 if no available channel, then it will fail at acs_init(),
without doing ACS computation. It will show the following in the log:
Could not select hw_mode and channel. (-3)
wlan0: interface state UNINITIALIZED->DISABLED
Then we can know the setting is incorrect already in
hostapd_select_hw_mode(), instead of waiting for scan callback function
to know if the setting is ok for ACS or not. This can save time and help
to tell if the setting is correct at the initial function at the first.
This will also allow the ENABLE control interface command to return FAIL
when adding an interface dynamically.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
Go through the received bandSupport JSON array and print its contents in
the debug log. This information might be exposed to upper layer
configuration generation/use somehow in the future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Most of the time is spent in the CP state machine RETIRE state where LKI
is not set and OKI is the currently used SAK so OLPN needs to be checked
for PN exhaustion.
hostapd/wpa_supplicant implemented an interpretation of the standard as
described in a proposed amendment titled "MKA pending PN exhastion"
which was deemed to be wrong. This amendment was included in IEEE Std
802.1Xck-2018.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Winter <Thomas.Winter@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
Most of the time is spent in the CP state machine RETIRE state where LKI
is not set and OKI is the currently used SAK, so OLPN needs to be
checked for PN exhaustion.
hostapd/wpa_supplicant implemented an interpretation of the standard as
described in a proposed amendment titled "MKA pending PN exhastion"
which was deemed to be wrong. This amendment was included in IEEE Std
802.1Xck-2018.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Winter <Thomas.Winter@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
The associated SAs have been deleted and the key server has changed so
there's no point in keeping the key values.
Note that this isn't specified in IEEE Std 802.1X-2010.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Winter <Thomas.Winter@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
Previously the ABANDON->RECEIVE state change was impossible and did not
match the CP state machine in IEEE Std 802.1X-2010 Figure 12-2.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Winter <Thomas.Winter@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
The RECEIVE and RETIRE states were incorrect which can result in
incorrect information being advertised in SAKuse MKPDUs. Change these to
match IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 12-2 (CP state machine).
hostapd/wpa_supplicant implemented an interpretation of the standard as
described in a proposed amendment titled "MKA pending PN exhastion"
which was deemed to be wrong. This amendment was included in IEEE Std
802.1Xck-2018.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Winter <Thomas.Winter@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
This code block with dependency on PCSC_FUNCS was missed when conf->pin
was moved to conf->cert.pin. Fix this to get rid of compilation issues
with CONFIG_PCSC=y builds.
Fixes: b99c4cadb7 ("EAP peer: Move certificate configuration params into shared struct")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new hostapd and wpa_supplicant configuration parameters dpp_name and
dpp_mud_url can now be used to set a specific name and MUD URL for the
Enrollee to use in the Configuration Request. dpp_name replaces the
previously hardcoded "Test" string (which is still the default if an
explicit configuration entry is not included). dpp_mud_url can
optionally be used to add a MUD URL to describe the Enrollee device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use the same rules for dropping driver notifications for Data frames
from unassociated stations as were added for Management frame reception.
This results in more consistent behavior in sending out Deauthentication
frames with Reason Code 6/7.
This case was already checking for unexpected multicast addresses, so
there was no issue for the PMF protections for unexpected disconnection.
Anyway, better avoid unnecessary Deauthentication frames consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A new argument to the DPP_AUTH_INIT command (conn_status=1) can now be
used to set Configurator to request a station Enrollee to report
connection result after a successfully completed provisioning step. If
the peer supports this, the DPP-CONF-SENT event indicates this with a
new argument (wait_conn_status=1) and the Configurator remains waiting
for the connection result for up to 16 seconds.
Once the Enrollee reports the result, a new DPP-CONN-STATUS-RESULT event
is generated with arguments result, ssid, and channel_list indicating
what the Enrollee reported. result=0 means success while non-zero codes
are for various error cases as specified in the DPP tech spec. If no
report is received from the Enrollee, the event with "timeout" argument
is generated locally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is more consistent with the use of CONFIG_DPP2 since the
Configuration Result message is sent only when using version 2 or newer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If only one of the allocations fails, the successful allocation needs to
be freed on the error path.
Fixes: 22f90b32f1 ("DPP2: Configuration Result message generation and processing")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous support in the 60 GHz band was for channels 1-4.
Add support for channels 5 and 6.
Signed-off-by: Alexei Avshalom Lazar <ailizaro@codeaurora.org>
IEEE Std 802.11F-2003 was withdrawn in 2006 and as such it has not been
maintained nor is there any expectation of the withdrawn trial-use
recommended practice to be maintained in the future. Furthermore,
implementation of IAPP in hostapd was not complete, i.e., only parts of
the recommended practice were included. The main item of some real use
long time ago was the Layer 2 Update frame to update bridges when a STA
roams within an ESS, but that functionality has, in practice, been moved
to kernel drivers to provide better integration with the networking
stack.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not process any received Management frames with unexpected/invalid SA
so that we do not add any state for unexpected STA addresses or end up
sending out frames to unexpected destination. This prevents unexpected
sequences where an unprotected frame might end up causing the AP to send
out a response to another device and that other device processing the
unexpected response.
In particular, this prevents some potential denial of service cases
where the unexpected response frame from the AP might result in a
connected station dropping its association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows us to send the OBSS PD settings to the kernel, such that the
driver can propagate them to the hardware/firmware.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
uClibc-ng optionally disabled deprecated POSIX functions like usleep,
causing compilation failures. This switches to nanosleep while retaining
support for older libcs that do not support nanosleep.
Signed-off-by: Rosen Penev <rosenp@gmail.com>
Update the documentation of QCA_ATTR_ROAM_CONTROL_SCAN_FREQ_LIST
to make it a nested attribute to carry frequencies of type u32.
This is to be in sync with the nl80211 attribute
NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Hardcode this to be defined and remove the separate build options for
PMF since this functionality is needed with large number of newer
protocol extensions and is also something that should be enabled in all
WPA2/WPA3 networks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
With DFS offloaded to the driver, hostapd state and CAC info was not
updated in DFS-CAC-START event, so STATUS output showed wrong info. Fix
this by updating the CAC related state when processing the driver event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to allow clean transition from one inner EAP
authentication method to another one if EAP method negotiation is needed
within Phase 2.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows EAP-TLS to be used within an EAP-TEAP tunnel when there is
an explicit request for machine credentials. The network profile
parameters are otherwise same as the Phase 1 parameters, but each one
uses a "machine_" prefix for the parameter name.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OCSP configuration is applicable to each instance of TLS-based
authentication and as such, the configuration might need to be different
for Phase 1 and Phase 2. Move ocsp into struct eap_peer_cert_config and
add a separate ocsp2 network profile parameter to set this for Phase 2.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow the previously hardcoded maximum numbers of EAP message rounds to
be configured in hostapd EAP server. This can be used, e.g., to increase
the default limits if very large X.509 certificates are used for EAP
authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These parameters for certificate authentication are identical for the
Phase 1 (EAP-TLS alone) and Phase 2 (EAP-TLS inside a TLS tunnel).
Furthermore, yet another copy would be needed to support separate
machine credential in Phase 2. Clean this up by moving the shared
parameters into a separate data struct that can then be used for each
need without having to define separate struct members for each use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Set the max value of optional bytes inside the data structure. This
requires us to calculate the actually used size when copying the
HE capabilities and generating the IE.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Sven Eckelmann <seckelmann@datto.com>
OSEN element was getting added both through the Authenticator IEs
(before some non-vendor elements) and separately at the end of the
frames with other vendor elements. Fix this by removing the separate
addition of the OSEN element and by moving the Authenticator IE addition
for OSEN to match the design used with WPA so that the vendor element
gets added in the proper place in the sequence of IEs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Even though the station is not supposed to include Hotspot 2.0
Indication element in the Association Request frame when connecting to
the open OSU BSS, some station devices seem to do so. With the strict
PMF-required-with-Hotspot-2.0-R2 interpretation, such connection
attempts were rejected. Relax this to only perform the PMF check if the
local AP configuration has PMF enabled, i.e., for the production BSS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Merge the separate debug print with the text name of the EAP code into
the same debug line with the numerical value to clean up debug log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Need to leave EAP-TEAP methodState == MAY_CONT when marking decision =
FAIL based on inner EAP method failure since this message will be
followed by protected failure indication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new eap_teap_id=5 hostapd configuration parameter value can be used
to configure EAP-TEAP server to request and require user and machine
credentials within the tunnel. This can be done either with Basic
Password Authentication or with inner EAP authentication methods.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Track PMK-R0/PMK-R0-Name from the initial mobility domain association
and derive PMK-R1/PTK when the station uses FT protocol. This allows
frames from additional roaming cases to be decrypted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows a separate machine credential to be used for authentication
if the server requests Identity-Type = 2 (machine).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is an initial step in adding support for configuring separate user
and machine credentials. The new wpa_supplicant network profile
parameters machine_identity and machine_password are similar to the
existing identity and password, but explicitly assigned for the purpose
of machine authentication.
This commit alone does not change actual EAP peer method behavior as
separate commits are needed to determine when there is an explicit
request for machine authentication. Furthermore, this is only addressing
the username/password credential type, i.e., additional changes
following this design approach will be needed for certificate
credentials.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Be more consistent on checking all parameter allocation and copying
steps within radius_server_init() and abort startup if anything fails
instead of trying to continue with other parts of the configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use struct eap_config as-is within RADIUS server to avoid having to
duplicate all the configuration variables at each interface. This
continues cleanup on struct eap_config duplication in hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Crypto-Binding TLV is included without Intermediate-Result TLV in
this sequence since the server is skipping all inner authentication
methods and is only sending out Result TLV with the Crypto-Binding TLV.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd configuration parameter eap_teap_id can be used to
configure the expected behavior for used identity type.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Parse the received Identity-Type TLV and report the used Identity-Type
in response if the request included this TLV. For now, only the
Identity-Type 1 (User) is supported.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow 100 rounds of EAP messages if there is data being transmitted.
Keep the old 50 round limit for cases where only short EAP messages are
sent (i.e., the likely case of getting stuck in ACK loop).
This allows larger EAP data (e.g., large certificates) to be exchanged
without breaking the workaround for ACK loop interop issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use struct eap_config as-is within struct eap_sm and EAPOL authenticator
to avoid having to duplicate all the configuration variables at each
interface. Split the couple of session specific variables into a
separate struct to allow a single const struct eap_config to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation was previously hardcoded to use only the non-expanded
IETF EAP methods in Phase 2. Extend that to allow vendor EAP methods
with expanded header to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already allowed with EAP-PEAP, but EAP-TEAP was hardcoded to
use only the non-expanded EAP types. Extend that to allow vendor EAP
types to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation was previously hardcoded to use only the non-expanded
IETF EAP methods in Phase 2. Extend that to allow vendor EAP methods
with expanded header to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already allowed with EAP-PEAP, but EAP-FAST was hardcoded to
use only the non-expanded EAP types. Extend that to allow vendor EAP
types to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation was previously hardcoded to allow only the Microsoft
SoH expanded EAP method in Phase 2 in addition to non-expanded EAP
methods. Extend that to allow any vendor EAP method with an expanded
header to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation was previously hardcoded to use only the non-expanded
IETF EAP methods in Phase 2. Extend that to allow vendor EAP methods
with expanded header to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already allowed with EAP-PEAP, but EAP-TTLS was hardcoded to
use only the non-expanded EAP types. Extend that to allow vendor EAP
types to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This cleans up coding style of the EAP implementation by avoiding
typedef of an enum hiding the type of the variables.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new eap_teap_separate_result=1 hostapd configuration parameter can
be used to test TEAP exchange where the Intermediate-Result TLV and
Crypto-Binding TLV are send in one message exchange while the Result TLV
exchange in done after that in a separate message exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the Crypto-Binding TLV for the last EAP method has been validated
successfully in a previous message exchange with Intermediate-Result TLV
and no new EAP method has been started, Result TLV can be accepted
without an additional Crypto-Binding TLV. This allows the server to go
through additional message exchanges after inner EAP method, if needed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is not sufficient for the peer to include only the Result TLV if the
server included both the Intermediate-Result TLV and Result TLV.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, only the Result TLV was added when writing Crypto-Binding
TLV response. This is not sufficient, since RFC 7170 require
Intermediate-Result TLV response to be included from the peer if the
server included Intermediate-Result TLV.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This version of TLS PRF is needed when using TEAP with TLS ciphersuites
that are defined to use SHA384 instead of SHA256.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previously used single TOD policy was split into two policies:
TOD-STRICT and TOD-TOFU. Report these separately in the
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT events (tod=1 for TOD-STRICT and tod=2 for
TOD-TOFU).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update Connection Params is intended for drivers that implement
internal SME and expect these updated connection params from
wpa_supplicant. Do not send this request for the drivers using
SME from wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If FT over-the-DS case is enforced through the "FT_DS <BSSID>" control
interface command, the PMF capability check during BSS selection is not
used and that could have allowed PMF to be disabled in the over-the-DS
case even if the local network profile mandated use of PMF. Check
against this explicitly to avoid unexpected cases if the APs within the
same mobility domain are not configured consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit e820cf952f ("MFP: Add MFPR flag into station RSN IE if 802.11w
is mandatory") added indication of MFPR flag in non-FT cases, but forgot
to do so for the FT protocol cases where a different function is used to
build the RSNE. Do the same change now for that FT specific case to get
consistent behavior on indicating PMF configuration state with MFPR.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is not used only with FT, so make the comments less confusing and
include the function in all builds to make it available for
non-FT/non-FILS builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
HE (802.11ax) is also supported on 2.4 GHz. And the 2.4 GHz band isn't
supposed to use VHT operations. Some codepaths in wpa_supplicant will
therefore not initialize the freq->bandwidth or the freq->center_freq1/2
members. As a result, the nl80211_put_freq_params() will directly return
an error (-1) or the kernel will return an error due to the invalid
channel definition.
Instead, the channel definitions should be created based on the actual
HT/VHT/none information on 2.4 GHz.
Fixes: ad9a1bfe78 ("nl80211: Share VHT channel configuration for HE")
Signed-off-by: Sven Eckelmann <seckelmann@datto.com>
Add vendor command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_AVOID_FREQUENCY_EXT
and attribute qca_wlan_vendor_attr_avoid_frequency_ext to send structured
avoid frequency data.
This new command is alternative to existing command
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_AVOID_FREQUENCY since existing command is
using stream of bytes instead of structured data using vendor attributes.
Signed-off-by: Rajeev Kumar Sirasanagandla <rsirasan@codeaurora.org>
As a part of P802.11ax amendment, 6 GHz band operation is added.
Since the 6 GHz channel numbers are overlapping with existing 2.4 GHz
and 5 GHz channel numbers, use frequency to identify unique channel
operation instead of channel number. Channel frequency is unique across
bands.
In the existing QCA vendor interface, wherever missing, add frequency
attributes to identify unique channel operation. In addition, add
comments to document some of the previously missed attributes/values.
Note: If both channel and frequency attributes are present in vendor
command/event and
(a) If both the driver and user-space application supports 6 GHz band
then channel related attributes are deprecated and use frequency
attributes.
(b) If either driver or user-space application or both doesn't
support 6 GHz band then use channel attributes.
Signed-off-by: Rajeev Kumar Sirasanagandla <rsirasan@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SAP_CONFIG_CHANNEL attribute in
enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_sap_config to use with vendor command
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SET_SAP_CONFIG.
This new attribute is used to restart AP on given channel.
Signed-off-by: Rajeev Kumar Sirasanagandla <rsirasan@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor sub command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_ACS_POLICY
with attributes enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_acs_config and
enum qca_acs_dfs_mode to configure ACS policy.
Signed-off-by: Rajeev Kumar Sirasanagandla <rsirasan@codeaurora.org>
This enhances the existing vendor command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_ROAM
with the following configurations:
1. Set/get/clear roam control
2. Set/get the channels on which the roaming has to be triggered.
3. Set/get the roam scan period.
4. Configure the triggers for roaming.
5. Configure the candidate selection criteria.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_roam_subcmd is an enum associated with the
attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ROAMING_SUBCMD. It represents different
sub command values and these are not the attributes. Hence, rename the
enum to qca_wlan_vendor_roaming_subcmd. Accordingly, the members of this
enum are also renamed to suite the usage.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update the version number for the build and also add the ChangeLog
entries for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant to describe main changes
between v2.7 and v2.8.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Need to update methodState/decision when completing transmission of
fragmented last Phase 2 message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The KCK, PMK, and PMKID derivation fix broke SAE key derivation for all
FFC groups. Fix that by setting sae->tmp->order_len for FFC groups (it
was only set for ECC groups).
Fixes: ac734a342e ("SAE: Fix KCK, PMK, and PMKID derivation for groups 22, 23, 24")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It looks like EVP_PKEY_derive() may change the returned length of the
buffer from the initial length determination (NULL buffer) to the
fetching of the value. Handle this by updating the secret length based
on the second call instead of the first one. This fixes some cases where
ECDH result has been used with extra data (zeros in the end) with OWE or
FILS PFS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This replaces the separately implemented ECDH operations with a single
helper function to avoid code duplication. In addition, this introduces
a workaround for strange OpenSSL behavior where the first
EVP_PKEY_derive(NULL) call to learn the size of the output shared secret
returns unexpectedly large buffer (72 octets when expected 32 octets for
group 19). It is not known what is causing this, but such behavior seems
to be showing up every now and then at least when running hwsim test
cases under UML and apparently mainly (only?) in the sigma_dut
controller cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.11-2016 is not exactly clear on the encoding of the bit
string that is needed for KCK, PMK, and PMKID derivation, but it seems
to make most sense to encode the (commit-scalar + peer-commit-scalar)
mod r part as a bit string by zero padding it from left to the length of
the order (in full octets).
The previous implementation used the length of the prime (in full
octets). This would work for KCK/PMK, but this results in deriving all
zero PMKIDs for the groups where the size of the order is smaller than
the size of the prime. This is the case for groups 22, 23, and 24.
However, those groups have been marked as being unsuitable for use with
SAE, so this fix should not really have a practical impact anymore.
Anyway, better fix it and document this clearly in the implementation
taken into account the unclarity of the standard in this area.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The earlier change to add support for BN_bn2binpad() and
BN_bn2bin_padded() broke this function for cases where no padding is
used (padlen == 0). Those would have always failed after the changes and
the function would return -1. There are no such cases in the current
hostap.git, so this did not have any real issues, but anyway, better fix
this function to match its documentation.
Fixes: 1e237903f5 ("OpenSSL: Use BN_bn2binpad() or BN_bn2bin_padded() if available")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit d896874f86 ("nl80211: Indicate 802.1X 4-way handshake offload
in connect") used the req_key_mgmt_offload flag to indicate to the
driver that it should offload the 802.1X handshake. However, this field
was existing and used for a different offload API. This causes
wpa_supplicant to send a connect request without the WANT_1X_HS flag and
the subsequent set-pmk is rejected causing the connection to fail. Fix
that by introducing a new flag req_handshake_offload so the offloads are
no longer entangled.
Fixes: d896874f86 ("nl80211: Indicate 802.1X 4-way handshake offload in connect")
Reported-by: Stefan Wahren <wahrenst@gmx.net>
Tested-by: Stefan Wahren <wahrenst@gmx.net>
Signed-off-by: Arend van Spriel <arend.vanspriel@broadcom.com>
The new hostapd configuration option eap_sim_id can now be used to
disable use of pseudonym and/or fast reauthentication with EAP-SIM,
EAP-AKA, and EAP-AKA'.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the EAP-SIM/AKA server does not provide a new pseudonym and the
locally configured "pseudonym" in anonymous_identity is actually an
anonymous identitity instead of a real EAP-SIM/AKA pseudonym, do not
clear the anonymous_identity network profile parameter. This is needed
to avoid forgetting the anonymous identity when going through
EAP-SIM/AKA authentication and then reverting back to using IMSI-based
(e.g., encrypted) identity.
Fixes: 4df4133917 ("EAP-SIM/AKA: Add support for anonymous@realm")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The relevant flags were only added in Linux 4.6, so we shouldn't
complain because they're missing. Also, they're always missing if a
device is being removed (e.g., 'iw dev wlan0 del', or if the device is
in the process of resetting itself). So kill those 2 birds with 1 stone:
if we can't find the file, just silently skip it.
Also, we probably should *actually* propagate the error if we had a
write failure.
Signed-off-by: Brian Norris <briannorris@chromium.org>
Add an SQLite table for defining per station MAC address version of
radius_auth_req_attr/radius_acct_req_attr information. Create the
necessary table and index where this doesn't exist. Select attributes
from the table keyed by station MAC address and request type (auth or
acct), parse and apply to a RADIUS message.
Add radius_req_attr_sqlite hostapd config option for SQLite database
file. Open/close RADIUS attribute database for a lifetime of a BSS and
invoke functions to add extra attributes during RADIUS auth and
accounting request generation.
Signed-off-by: Terry Burton <tez@terryburton.co.uk>
We will want to parse RADIUS attributes in config file format when
retrieving them from an SQLite database.
Signed-off-by: Terry Burton <tez@terryburton.co.uk>
Previously, check for local MI,MN in a peer's Peers List accepted only
the cases that include the last used MN from an MKPDU sent by the local
device. This was problematic since it was possible to synchronize MKPDU
transmission between two devices in a way that made them always miss the
last MKPDU from the other device before filling in the Peers List.
Relax this matching requirement of "acceptably recent MN" to mean both
the last used MN and the one used just before it (i.e., copied from
either of the last two MKPDUs sent by the local device) are accepted.
While this might help in some real world scenarios in making the
protocol converge more quickly, the main help from this is to fix
consistent hwsim test cases failures in macsec_psk_ns when using UML
with time travel option which happened to practically guarantee the
inconvenient timing of MKPDU transmission/reception that ended up with
the MKPDU processing to see MI,MN with MN being the last used MN minus
1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Disable groups that use Brainpool curves for now since they leak more
timing information due to the prime not being close to a power of two.
This removes use of groups 28, 29, and 30 from SAE and EAP-pwd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The AP mode fix for removing NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME from
NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION did not consider the TDLS case and that resulted
in incorrectly removing WMM parameters from TDLS STA entry updates. Fix
this by considering the WPA_STA_TDLS_PEER flag similarly to the other
update parameters.
Fixes: 6d14b98fc6 ("nl80211: Do not add WMM parameters when updating an existing STA entry")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is a compiler specific extension and not compliant with the C
standard.
Fixes: 1c16b257a0 ("EAP-SIM: Add Session-Id derivation during fast-reauth")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is a compiler specific extension and not compliant with the C
standard.
Fixes: 5eefa8115b ("EAP-AKA: Add Session-Id derivation during fast-reauth")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new "wpa" and "AKMSuiteSelector" entries in hostapd "STA <addr>"
control interface output can be used to determine the negotiated WPA/RSN
protocol and AKM suite of an associated station.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These SAE, OWE, DPP, and OSEN AKM suite selectors were covered in the
reverse conversion in rsn_key_mgmt_to_bitfield(), but were missing from
wpa_akm_to_suite(). Add them to make AKM suite selector reporting more
accurate in RADIUS Accounting messages (and future users of this
function).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use a shared function to determine the k parameter, i.e., the minimum
number of iterations of the PWE derivation loop, for SAE and EAP-pwd.
This makes it easier to fine-tune the parameter based on the negotiated
group, if desired.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make the EAP-pwd peer use same default set of allowed groups as the SAE
implementation in wpa_supplicant uses, i.e., the groups 19-21 using NIST
curves P-256, P-384, and P-521. Previously, all groups that were
supported by the crypto library were allowed. In practice, this change
disables use of the Brainpool curves (groups 28-30) with recent OpenSSL
versions.
The default set of groups can be overridden with a new phase1 network
profile parameter, eap_pwd_groups=<list of allowed ranges>. For example,
phase1="eap_pwd_groups=0-65535" would restore previous behavior of
allowing all implemented groups to be used while eap_pwd_groups=19,20
would enable only the groups using NIST curves P-256 and P-384 to be
used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add attributes QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_ELNA_BYPASS under
the enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_config to support set and get
the ELNA bypass.
Signed-off-by: Paul Zhang <paulz@codeaurora.org>
Add a new vendor attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_DISCONNECT_IES
to configure disconnect IEs to the driver. Driver shall fill
these IEs in disassoc/deauth frame.
These IEs are expected to be considered only for the next
immediate disconnection (disassoc/deauth frame) originated by
the DUT, irrespective of the entity (user space/driver/firmware)
triggering the disconnection.
The host drivers are not expected to use the IEs set through
this interface for further disconnections after the first immediate
disconnection initiated post the configuration.
If the IEs are also updated through cfg80211 interface (after the
enhancement to cfg80211_disconnect), host driver is expected to
take the union of IEs from both of these interfaces and send in
further disassoc/deauth frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor sub command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_OEM_DATA
with attributes qca_wlan_vendor_attr_oem_data_params to support
OEM data. It is used to send OEM data binary blobs from
application/service to firmware. The attributes defined in enum
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_oem_data_params are used to deliver the
parameters.
Signed-off-by: Paul Zhang <paulz@codeaurora.org>
The new certificate chain debug dumps used functions that are not
available with LibreSSL or BoringSSL.
Fixes: 857edf4bf4 ("OpenSSL: More debug prints of configured ciphers and certificates")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER ifdef block left out the local variable that
is needed with all versions. In addition, SSL_set_security_level() is
not available with LibreSSL or BoringSSL.
Fixes: 3ec65a8e38 ("OpenSSL: Allow anon-DH cipher suites to be added for TEAP")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The tls_connection_get_cipher_suite() implementation used
SSL_CIPHER_get_protocol_id which was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1. Need to use
compatibility code with older versions.
Fixes: 94714ec341 ("OpenSSL: Add tls_connection_get_cipher_suite()")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds an encrypted version of a one octet application data payload
to the end of the handshake when TLS v1.3 is used to indicate explicit
termination of the handshake (either after Finished message or after the
optional NewSessionTicket message). The current
draft-ietf-emu-eap-tls13-05 defines this to be a zero length payload,
but since that is not allowed by OpenSSL, use a one octet payload
instead for now with hopes of getting the draft specification updated
instead of having to modify OpenSSL for this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-TLS with TLS 1.3 uses an empty application data record from the
server to indicate end of the exchange, so EAP-TLS peer will need to
check for this special case and finish the exchange with an empty
EAP-TLS (ACK) so that the server can send out EAP-Success.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This will hopefully not be needed for EAP-TLS use cases since there
should not really be a middlebox that looks at the TLS layer details in
case of EAP authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd EAP server can now be configured with two separate server
certificates/keys to enable parallel operations using both RSA and ECC
public keys. The server will pick which one to use based on the client
preferences for the cipher suite (in the TLS ClientHello message). It
should be noted that number of deployed EAP peer implementations do not
filter out the cipher suite list based on their local configuration and
as such, configuration of alternative types of certificates on the
server may result in interoperability issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds support for a new EAP method: EAP-TEAP (Tunnel Extensible
Authentication Protocol). This should be considered experimental since
RFC 7170 has number of conflicting statements and missing details to
allow unambiguous interpretation. As such, there may be interoperability
issues with other implementations and this version should not be
deployed for production purposes until those unclear areas are resolved.
This does not yet support use of NewSessionTicket message to deliver a
new PAC (either in the server or peer implementation). In other words,
only the in-tunnel distribution of PAC-Opaque is supported for now. Use
of the NewSessionTicket mechanism would require TLS library support to
allow arbitrary data to be specified as the contents of the message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new TLS_CONN_* flag to provide a higher level mechanism for adding
(instead of fully replacing) allowed list of TLS ciphersuites for TEAP
provisioning purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This implements "tls-unique" derivation per RFC 5929, Section 3. This
will be needed for channel binding, e.g., with EAP-TEAP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The buf[] array is initialized to zeros, so it was already null
terminated since the read() call did not allow the last character of the
buffer to be overwritten. Since that was apparently not enough to make
some static analyzers understand the design, use explicit null
termination after a successful read() call.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reduces differences in timing and memory access within the
hunting-and-pecking loop for ECC groups that have a prime that is not
close to a power of two (e.g., Brainpool curves).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reduces differences in timing and memory access within the
hunting-and-pecking loop for ECC groups that have a prime that is not
close to a power of two (e.g., Brainpool curves).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
'sizeof' was not used with os_memmove() for an integer array. This lead
to an issue with part of the preferred channel list not being used.
Fixes: 79329ae0aa ("P2P: Verify local driver preferred frequencies for P2P use cases")
Signed-off-by: Daichi Ueura <daichi.ueura@sony.com>
Mesh points can partially support HE features (when requiring no
controlling STA/AP) as long as hardware supports it. The kernel just
requires support for HE mesh and wpa_supplicant can forward the peer
capabilities to the kernel for further processing.
Signed-off-by: Sven Eckelmann <seckelmann@datto.com>
The HE capabilities are no longer per PHY but per iftype on this
specific PHY. It is therefore no longer enough to just parse the AP
capabilities.
The he_capabilities are now duplicated to store all information for
IEEE80211_MODE_* which hostap cares about. The nl80211 driver fills in
this information when the iftype supports HE. The rest of the code still
only uses the IEEE80211_HE_AP portion but can be extended later to also
use other HE capabilities.
Signed-off-by: Sven Eckelmann <seckelmann@datto.com>
Declare the variable only once and reuse it instead of openning
unneeded scopes.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The the mask for PPE threshold present in the HE phy capability byte 6 is
0x80 and not 0x6. This incorrect mask breaks the length calculation and as
result the acceptance of the HE capabilities for STAs which either:
* don't have the PPE threshold present bit set AND the Codebook Size={7,5}
MU Feedback or the Triggered SU Beamforming feedback bit set
* do have the PPE threshold present set AND neither the Codebook Size={7,5}
MU Feedback nor the Triggered SU Beamforming feedback bit set
Fixes: 8f5fc369e2 ("HE: Fix HE Capabilities element variable length encoding")
Signed-off-by: Sven Eckelmann <seckelmann@datto.com>
Some compilers have started to warn about this and the use of two loops
with ix 0..pa-1 and 0..pa loop a bit suspicious, so better make sure the
array is initialized with zeros before extracting the terms from it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This does not need to be specific to X.509, so move the BOOLEAN DER
encoding validation into asn1_get_next() to make it apply for all cases
instead of having to have the caller handle this separately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While BER encoding allows any nonzero value to be used for TRUE, DER is
explicitly allowing only the value 0xff. Enforce this constraint in
X.509 parsing to be more strict with what is acceptable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Handling of the optional pathLenConstraint after cA was not done
properly. The position after cA needs to be compared to the end of the
SEQUENCE, not the end of the available buffer, to determine whether the
optional pathLenConstraint is present. In addition, when parsing
pathLenConstraint, the length of the remaining buffer was calculated
incorrectly by not subtracting the length of the header fields needed
for cA. This could result in reading couple of octets beyond the end of
the buffer before rejecting the ASN.1 data as invalid.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=15408
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds a CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT even for depth=0 even if a depth >
0 certificate results in peer certificate validation error. Previously,
this case resulted in the upper layers not getting any information about
the used peer certificate. Now that information is available, e.g., to
allow server certificate -based overriding of the trust to be done.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The same len variable can be used for both needs within
ieee802_1x_get_keys() to avoid compiler warning about use of shadowed
variable.
Fixes: 0ee6885dae ("macsec: Store EAP-Key-Name as eapSessionId")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This implements the required functionality in hostapd to facilitate OWE
connection with the AP SME-in-driver cases. Stations can either send DH
IE or PMKID (in RSNE) (or both) in Association Request frame during the
OWE handshake. The drivers that use this offload mechanism do not
interpret this information and instead, pass the same to hostapd for
further processing. hostapd will either validate the PMKID obtained from
the STA or generate DH IE and further indicate the same to the driver.
The driver further sends this information in the Association Response
frame.
Signed-off-by: Srinivas Dasari <dasaris@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Liangwei Dong <liangwei@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This command/event interface can be used by SME based host drivers that
rely on user space (hostapd/wpa_supplicant) for DH IE
processing/generation. This interface facilitates the OWE connection
with host drivers by offloading DH IE processing to the user space
(hostapd/wpa_supplicant).
Signed-off-by: Srinivas Dasari <dasaris@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Liangwei Dong <liangwei@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to allow upper layer software to learn the hash of the
server certificate for allowing user to override trust root
configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add tod=1 to CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT events if the peer certificate
includes the TOD policy in the X.509v3 Certificate Policies extension.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to add new information to the callbacks without
having to modify each callback function type in EAPOL and EAP code every
time.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
sscanf() can apparently read beyond the end of the buffer even if the
maximum length of the integer is specified in the format string. Replace
this parsing mechanism with helper functions that use sscanf() with NUL
terminated string to avoid this.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=15158
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
src/*/Makefile needs to allow additional CFLAGS values to be provided
from the calling Makefiles so that the clang command line arguments to
enable sanitizers consistently. In addition, it can be useful to be able
to provide CC, CFLAGS, and LDFLAGS from external setup while still
requesing LIBFUZZER=y build. Allow that by not overriding these
variables if they are already set.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The driver automatically starts beacon reporting if it pauses the beacon
reporting for any reason other than disconnection. In specific cases,
userspace may not want the beacon reporting to be automatically resumed
after a pause. Add interface support for userspace to specify driver not
to start beacon reporting automatically after a pause.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the EAP Session-ID is available, add it into Access-Accept
(EAP-Key-Name attribute). This is needed for MACsec.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It is safer to maintain the old EAPOL version (2) in EAPOL frames that
are not related to MACsec and only update the version to 3 for the
MACsec specific cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the following vendor attributes under the enum
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_spectral_scan to support the configuration of
Spectral DMA debug.
1. QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SPECTRAL_SCAN_CONFIG_DMA_RING_DEBUG
Enable/disable debug of the Spectral DMA ring
2. QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SPECTRAL_SCAN_CONFIG_DMA_BUFFER_DEBUG
Enable/disable debug of the Spectral DMA buffers
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
SIM-based EAP authentication with IMSI encryption requires a special EAP
Identity response: anonymous@realm. Then the server sends AKA-Identity
request which is answered with the encrypted IMSI. Add logic that
indicates if the special anonymous identity is used. Otherwise, this
field is used for storing the pseudonym.
Test: Connect to Carrier Wi-Fi, verify correct behavior from captures
Test: Connect to non IMSI encrypted EAP-AKA AP, verify pseudonym usage
Signed-off-by: Hai Shalom <haishalom@google.com>
External auth status to the driver includes the PMKID derived as part of
SAE authentication, but this is not valid if PMKSA caching is disabled.
Drivers might not be expecting PMKID when it is not valid. Do not send
the PMKID to the driver in such cases.
Signed-off-by: Srinivas Dasari <dasaris@codeaurora.org>
A driver that uses internal AP SME may need to be able to use the
external_auth status operation in station mode, so do not skip this
solely based on drv->device_ap_sme; instead, use that condition only
when operating in AP mode.
Fix external_auth status in non SME case.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Kumar <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
With radio work design, send Action frame request will be queued and
wait for p2p-scan to finish, so there is no need to delay send_action.
This change revisits the logic (added before the radio work framework)
in below commits:
3f9285f P2P: Delay send_action call if p2p_scan is in progress
f44ae20 P2P: Drop pending TX frame on new p2p_connect
9d562b7 P2P: Add p2p_unauthorize command
63a965c P2P: Fix after_scan_tx processing during ongoing operations
9a58e52 P2PS: Callback to create pending group after sending PD Response
3433721 P2P: Continue p2p_find after sending non-success Invitation Response
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
In case the current channel has regulatory WMM limitations, take them
into account when filling the WMM element. Also check if the new WMM
element is different from the previous one and if so change the
parameter_set_count to imply stations to look into it.
Signed-off-by: Haim Dreyfuss <haim.dreyfuss@intel.com>
ETSI EN 301 893 v2.1.1 (2017-05) standard defines a new channel access
mechanism that all devices (WLAN and LAA) need to comply with.
In previous versions the device was allowed by ETSI to implement
802.11 channel access mechanism based on a set of priority classes
which are taken from 802.11. According of the new standard there
might be some exceptions which require ETSI countries to follow
more restrictive rules. In such a case the AP's wmm IE need to
comply with ETSI limitation. To be able to do so the regulatory
domain passes the new limitation values if needed.
Implement this, by storing it and use it to calculate the new
WMM parameters.
This commit adds determination of regulator limitations to
NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY processing so that the information is available
for upper layer implementation to use later when constructing WMM
element.
Signed-off-by: Haim Dreyfuss <haim.dreyfuss@intel.com>
Add support for injecting frames to a given mesh peer, bypassing the
mpath table lookup using PROBE_MESH_LINK command. This helps to send
data frames over unexercised direct mesh path, which is not selected as
next_hop node. This can be helpful in measuring link metrics.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
In the case of the ap_csa_disable test, I frequently see
failures due to the kernel *not* having switched, but the
CSA-STARTED event having been processed, and thus the
frequency having been updated already.
This is wrong at least for AP mode, the frequency we store
for this case internally in nl80211 should only be updated
when the channel switch completes, otherwise we end up in
a situation where the switch is aborted and the kernel is
thus on the old channel, but the internal information has
been updated and every subsequent mgmt-frame TX fails due
to being tagged with the wrong channel.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
GnuTLS backend already accepts CA cert blobs in both DER and PEM
formats. Implement similar trial-and-error handling in OpenSSL backend.
Signed-off-by: Santtu Lakkala <santtu.lakkala@jolla.com>
When a new station is added, let it have some supported rates
(they're empty without this change), using the basic rates
that it must support to connect.
This, together with the kernel-side changes for client-side,
lets us finish the complete auth/assoc handshake with higher
rates than the mandatory ones, without any further config.
However, the downside to this is that a broken station that
doesn't check the basic rates are supported before it tries
to connect will possibly not get any response to its auth
frame.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add a config option to allow setting a custom Basic NSS/MCS set. As a
default we use single stream HE-MCS 0-7.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Set operating channel bandwidth and center frequencies using the same
attributes for VHT and HE.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Process HE information in (Re)Association Request frames and add HE
elements into (Re)Association Response frames when HE is enabled in the
BSS.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
The HE Capibilities element has dynamic size due to the variable length
and optional fields at the end. Mask out the channel width capabilities
that are less than the configured. Only add the MCS/NSS sets for the
announced channel widths and also add the PPET elements.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
The PPE Thresholds information in the end of the HE Capabilities element
is optional and of variable length. struct he_ppe_threshold was not
really used correctly for encoding this, so remove it and just reserve
enough space for the information.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
This is used for both VHT and HE, so remove the misleading prefix.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
These are used for both VHT and HE, so remove the misleading prefix.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
These are used for both VHT and HE, so remove the misleading prefix.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Bandwidth is used for both VHT and HE here.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
oper_chwidth is used for both VHT and HE here.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
The bandwidth values are shared between VHT and HE mode so remove the
VHT specific prefix.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
These bits might be set by the capabilities read from the kernel, so
mask them out if beamforming is not enabled in the local configuration.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
This copying attempt was added incorrectly since that element is never
actually present in (Re)Association Request frames. It is only valid to
copy that element from the mesh peering frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
gcc 8.3.0 was apparently clever enough to optimize away the previously
used os_memset() to explicitly clear a stack buffer that contains keys
when that clearing happened just before returning from the function.
Since memset_s() is not exactly portable (or commonly available yet..),
use a less robust mechanism that is still pretty likely to prevent
current compilers from optimizing the explicit clearing of the memory
away.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Initialize auth_sock and acct_sock to -1 to avoid radius_server_deinit()
attempting to close fd=0 if anything fails in setting up the RADIUS
server.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Session-Id derivation for EAP-AKA in RFC 5247 only explained how the
Session-Id is derived for regular authentication. Jouni reported it as
an errata with text explaining how to derive it during fast
reauthentication.
This patch now exports the Session-Id for EAP-AKA during fast
reauthentication based on this Session-Id = 0x17 || NONCE_S || MAC
construction.
Also documented by Alan Dekok in draft-dekok-emu-eap-session-id.
Signed-off-by: Mohit Sethi <mohit.sethi@aalto.fi>
The Session-Id derivation for EAP-SIM in RFC 5247 only explained how the
Session-Id is derived for regular authentication. Jouni reported it as
an errata with text explaining how to derive it during fast
reauthentication.
This patch now exports the Session-Id for EAP-SIM during fast
reauthentication based on this Session-Id = 0x12 || NONCE_S || MAC
construction.
Signed-off-by: Mohit Sethi <mohit.sethi@aalto.fi>
The rcons[] and Td4s[] array values need to be type cast explicitly to
u32 for the left shift 24 operation to be defined due to the implicit
conversion to int not handling the case where MSB would become 1 without
depending on UB.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=14929
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The IE header length check was off-by-one and that could allow the loop
to read one octet beyond the end of the buffer before breaking out in
the second check.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=14927
Fixes: 0a66ce3c49 ("WNM: Add support for SSID List element matching")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The bootstrapping URI format for DPP was extended during protocol design
to allow a list of channels without having to repeat the same operating
class information for each channel. That change was not included in the
initial implementation of the parser and a channel-list like
"C:81/1,6,11" would not be understood correctly (i.e., only the longer
"C:81/1,81/6,81/11" form would have been parsed correctly).
Fix this by extending the parser to accept both the shorter and longer
form for a list of channels within a single operating class.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016 requires the FILS STA to do this check, but this
was missing from the initial implementation. The AP side behavior was
not described properly in 802.11ai due to a missing change in the
(Re)Association Response frame format tables which has resulted in some
deployed devices not including the RSNE.
For now, use an interoperability workaround to ignore the missing RSNE
and only check the payload of the element if it is present in the
protected frame. In other words, enforce this validation step only with
an AP that implements FILS authentication as described in REVmd while
allowing older implementations to skip this check (and the protection
against downgrade attacks). This workaround may be removed in the future
if it is determined that most deployed APs can be upgraded to add RSNE
into the (Re)Association Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This AP behavior was missing from IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, but it is
needed for the RSNE validation to work correctly and for a FILS STA to
be able to perform the mandatory check for RSNE matching when processing
the (Re)Association Response frame (as described in 802.11ai). REVmd
will be updating the standard to cover this AP case, so prepare the
implementation to match that. Without this, a FILS STA might reject
association whenever using FILS authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If OCSP_resp_find_status() fails with the first OCSP_CERTID, the
generation of the second OCSP_CERTID ended up leaking memory. Fix this
by freeing the previously allocated OCSP_CERTID on that code path.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not allow auth->own_protocol_key to be overridden without having
freed the previously stored key in case a test sequence in
dpp_proto_auth_conf_replaced_by_resp is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not allow auth->peer_protocol_key to be overridden without having
freed the previously stored key in case two Authentication Response
messages are received.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The result of EC_GROUP_dup() needs to be freed, so do so within the
derivation functions for all error cases and in the callers for success
cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use a separate error case handler for eap_pax_mac() failures and memcmp
to avoid wpa_hexdump() calls for the (mainly theoretical) local error
cases in deriving the MAC.
Fixes: b3c2b5d9f7 ("EAP-PAX server: Check hash function results")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is mostly a theoretical case, but since crypto_bignum_rand() could
fail, need to free the allocated struct crypto_bignum *tmp in such a
case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
BN_clear() does not free the BIGNUM; it only clears its value. Fix this
memory leak by using the appropriate BN_clear_free() function instead.
Fixes: b11fa98bcb ("Add explicit checks for peer's DH public key")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name() allocates memory for the returned pointer,
so need to free this with EC_GROUP_free() before leaving the calling
functions. This was leaking memory when parsing JWK and when performing
PKEX.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
ec_params needs to be freed before returning from the function.
Extension of this function to support BoringSSL introduced this memory
leak and that was later extended to be the only variant and apply to
OpenSSL and LibreSSL cases as well in commit c23e87d0d1 ("OpenSSL:
Replace EVP_PKEY_paramgen() with EC_KEY_new_by_curve_name()").
Fixes: f29761297b ("BoringSSL: Implement crypto_ecdh_init()")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
In practice, some APs have interop issues with the DUT. This sub command
is used to transfer the AP info between the driver and user space. This
works both as a command and event. As a command, it configures the
stored list of APs from user space to firmware; as an event, it
indicates the AP info detected by the firmware to user space for
persistent storage. The attributes defined in enum
qca_vendor_attr_interop_issues_ap are used to deliver the parameters.
Signed-off-by: Paul Zhang <paulz@codeaurora.org>
If none of the sr_control bits are set, we do not neet to add the IE to
the Beacon frame.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
While this should not happen in practical use cases,
wpa_get_ntp_timestamp() could return the same value when called twice in
a row quickly. Work around that case by enforcing a new Replay Counter
value based on stored last value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Update enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_get_wifi_info to add support for
attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_WIFI_INFO_RADIO_INDEX. In addition
update the documentation for qca_wlan_vendor_attr_get_wifi_info and
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_WIFI_INFO to fully describe the
operation of the command and the format of the attributes.
Signed-off-by: Jeff Johnson <jjohnson@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor sub command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_BEACON_REPORTING
to implement beacon reporting feature. Different operations required to
implement this feature can be specified in
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_BEACON_REPORTING_OP_TYPE.
Userspace requests the driver/firmware to periodically report received
Beacon frames whose BSSID matches the current connected BSS's MAC
address. If userspace requests the driver/firmware to send beacon
reports actively, the driver encapsulates the details of the beacon in
an event and sends it to userspace asynchronously. Otherwise, the driver
will only update the beacon in cfg80211 scan cache but will not send any
event to userspace.
If this command is not issued, the current behavior of the
driver/firmware is to update the cfg80211 scan cache only when there is
a scan issued by the host in progress or whenever there is a change in
IEs of the Beacon frames from the current connected BSS.
The userspace requests the driver/firmware to stop reporting beacons
when reporting is not required anymore. If the driver/firmware is not
able to receive Beacon frames because of other Wi-Fi operations such as
off-channel activities, etc., the driver/firmware sends a pause event to
userspace and stops reporting Beacon frames. The driver/firmware
indicates whether the beacon reporting automatically resumes later by
using the QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_BEACON_REPORTING_AUTO_RESUMES flag. If
userspace doesn't want the beacon reporting to be resumed automatically,
userspace can send QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_BEACON_REPORTING_OP_STOP command to
the driver to stop beacon reporting.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds support to hostapd for configuring airtime policy settings for
stations as they connect to the access point. This is the userspace
component of the airtime policy enforcement system PoliFi described in
this paper: https://arxiv.org/abs/1902.03439
The Linux kernel part has been merged into mac80211 for the 5.1 dev
cycle.
The configuration mechanism has three modes: Static, dynamic and limit.
In static mode, weights can be set in the configuration file for
individual MAC addresses, which will be applied when the configured
stations connect.
In dynamic mode, weights are instead set per BSS, which will be scaled
by the number of active stations on that BSS, achieving the desired
aggregate weighing between the configured BSSes. Limit mode works like
dynamic mode, except that any BSS *not* marked as 'limited' is allowed
to exceed its configured share if a per-station fairness share would
assign more airtime to that BSS. See the paper for details on these
modes.
Signed-off-by: Toke Høiland-Jørgensen <toke@toke.dk>
This provides a mechanism for configuring per-STA airtime weight for
airtime policy configuration.
Signed-off-by: Toke Høiland-Jørgensen <toke@toke.dk>
Commit 373c796948 ("OpenSSL: Fix compile with OpenSSL 1.1.0 and
deprecated APIs") removed a call to ENGINE_load_dynamic() for newer
versions of OpenSSL, asserting that it should happen automatically.
That appears not to be the case, and loading engines now fails because
the dynamic engine isn't present.
Fix it by calling ENGINE_load_builtin_engines(), which works for all
versions of OpenSSL. Also remove the call to ERR_load_ENGINE_strings()
because that should have happened when SSL_load_error_strings() is
called anyway.
Fixes: 373c796948 ("OpenSSL: Fix compile with OpenSSL 1.1.0 and deprecated APIs")
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>
Maintain a single array (of struct with two int variables) instead of
two independent arrays (of int) for tracking know ifindexes and reasons
for having added them. The previous implementation tried to maintain two
independent arrays even though they were always required to be of
exactly same length and order. That had resulted in a bug earlier and
the code was not exactly easy to understand either, so replace this with
a single array.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Addition of a separate if_indices_reason array broke reallocation
failure checking. drv->if_indices or drv->if_indices_reason could not be
NULL in the place where this check was moved to. Fix that by maintaining
knowledge of reallocation failure in a separate local variable.
Fixes: 732b1d20ec ("nl80211: Clean up ifidx properly if interface in a bridge is removed")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no point in checking this pointer against NULL after it has
been dereferenced. Move the check to the beginning of the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows authenticator side to complete FT initial mobility domain
association using FT-EAP with PMKSA caching.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When completing FT initial mobility domain association with EAP, store
XXKey/MPMK in the PMKSA cache instead of MSK. The previously stored MSK
was of no use since it could not be used as the XXKey for another FT
initial mobility domain association using PMKSA caching.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows supplicant side to complete FT initial mobility domain
association using FT-EAP with PMKSA caching.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When completing FT initial mobility domain association with EAP, store
XXKey/MPMK in the PMKSA cache instead of MSK. The previously stored MSK
was of no use since it could not be used as the XXKey for another FT
initial mobility domain association using PMKSA caching.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It is apparently possible to somehow trigger the driver to report a
channel switch event during ACS operation when the interface information
is not yet complete. hapd->iface->current_mode could be NULL in that
case and that would result in process termination due to NULL pointer
dereference.
It should not really be possible to trigger a channel switch during ACS
is running (i.e., before the AP mode operation has been started), but
since that has been seen in an arbitrary test sequence with interface
start/stop operations with various parameters (both valid and invalid),
better prevent a crash here by ignoring the unexpected event instead of
trying to process it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Unexpected CHAN_SWITCH command could get this function using a NULL
pointer if the channel switch was requested while the interface was
already disabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
driver->hapd_deinit() is going to free the memory that the cached
pointers are pointing to, so clear the pointers to avoid possibility of
dereferencing used memory. It seemed to be possible to hit a code path
using those fields by issuing a CHAN_SWITCH command on disabled hostapd
interface in some cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds a ieee80211ax=0/1 line to the STATUS output to indicate
the configuration of ieee80211ax, which similar to ieee80211n and
ieee80211ac.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The first four octets of the element were used as a host byte order u32.
That is not correct on bigendian CPUs, so handle byte swapping needs
properly. Mark the he_oper_params field as le32 to explicitly indicate
the byte order and swap the generated params content based on CPU byte
order.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The current code will always use the size required when all optional
elements are present. This will cause the Linux kernel to consider the
field to be malformed if the elements are not actually flagged as being
present.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Start sharing common SAE and EAP-pwd functionality by adding a new
source code file that can be included into both. This first step is
bringing in a shared function to check whether a group is suitable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Move the identical function used by both SAE and EAP-pwd to
src/utils/common.c to avoid duplicated implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This converts crypto_bignum_to_bin() to use the OpenSSL/BoringSSL
functions BN_bn2binpad()/BN_bn2bin_padded(), when available, to avoid
differences in runtime and memory access patterns depending on the
leading bytes of the BIGNUM value.
OpenSSL 1.0.2 and LibreSSL do not include such functions, so those cases
are still using the previous implementation where the BN_num_bytes()
call may result in different memory access pattern.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This reduces timing and memory access pattern differences for an
operation that could depend on the used password.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This reduces timing and memory access pattern differences for an
operation that could depend on the used password.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
SPR allows us to detect OBSS overlaps and allows us to do adaptive CCA
thresholds. For this to work the AP needs to broadcast the element
first.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Properly populate the the HE Capabilities element with the info read
from the kernel.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
According to P802.11ax/D4.0 9.4.2.238 (HE Operation element) the BSS
Color Information field is located after the HE Operation Parameters
field. Fix the ordering of the bit masks/offsets for fields in these 3+1
octets used as a single 32-bit value. With these changes, Wireshark 3.2
is able to properly parse and display Beacon frames.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
IEEE P802.11ax/D4.0 9.4.2.243 "HE Operation element" indicates that the
special value 1023 in the TXOP Duration RTS Threshold field is used to
indicate that TXOP duration-based RTS is disabled. Use that value as the
default instead of the previously used value 0 which would really mean
threshold of 0 usec. Furthermore, the previous implementation did not
allow values larger than 255 to be used for this field while the field
is actually 10 bits in size.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Add code to parse NL80211_BAND_ATTR_IFTYPE_DATA when reading the band
info. This is needed to find out about the local HE capabilities in AP
mode.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
The QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_HE_CAPABILITIES attributes are not
up-to-date with the latest P802.11ax/D4.0 capabilities and would need to
be updated or replaced. Since the variables from this functionality were
not used for anything in practice, it is easier to simply remove this
functionality completely to avoid issues with upcoming updates to use
upstream nl80211 information to determine HE capabilities.
This is practically reverting the commit ca1ab9db2a ("hostapd: Get
vendor HE capabilities").
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to upper layer components to manage operating
channels in cases where the same radio is shared for both station and AP
mode virtual interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Omer Dagan <omer.dagan@tandemg.com>
Logs involving IEEE 802.11 Status Codes output the Status Code value,
but do not provide any explanation of what the value means. This change
provides a terse explanation of each status code using the latter part
of the Status Code #define names.
Signed-off-by: Alex Khouderchah <akhouderchah@chromium.org>
These cases are for the IEEE 802.11 Status Code and Reason Code and
those fields are unsigned 16 bit values, so use the more appropriate
type consistently. This is mainly to document the uses and to make the
source code easier to understand.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Logs involving IEEE 802.11 Reason Codes output the Reason Code value,
but do not provide any explanation of what the value means. This change
provides a terse explanation of each Reason Code using the latter part
of the reason code #define names.
Signed-off-by: Alex Khouderchah <akhouderchah@chromium.org>
The new hostapd configuration parameter dpp_controller can now be used
with the following subparameter values: ipaddr=<IP address>
pkhash=<hexdump>. This adds a new Controller into the configuration
(i.e., more than one can be configured) and all incoming DPP exchanges
that match the specified Controller public key hash are relayed to the
particular Controller.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add initial implementation of DPP-over-TCP. This adds the general TCP
encapsulation routines into the shared src/common/dpp.c implementation.
That functionality will be exposed through hostapd and wpa_supplicant in
the following commits.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be helpful for testing DPP2 Controller functionality (get
pkhash from Controller to Relay).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be used to provide configurable parameter to the global DPP
context. This initial commit introduces the msg_ctx context pointer for
wpa_msg().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update the version number for the build and also add the ChangeLog
entries for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant to describe main changes
between v2.7 and v2.8.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-PAX server implementation could end up reading beyond the end of the
buffer if MSGDUMP level debugging was enabled and a message without the
ICV field was received. Fix this by using more strict message length
validation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this is mostly theoretical, the hash functions can fail and it is
better for the upper layer code to explicitly check for such failures.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not try to derive a PMK-R0 and PMK-R1 again for the case where an
association was started with FT protocol and PTK is rekeyed using 4-way
handshake. Instead, use the previously derived PMK-R1 to allow a new PTK
to be derived.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not try to derive a PMKID for EAPOL-key msg 1/4 when going through
4-way handshake to rekey PTK during an association that was started
through FT protocol.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to allow PTK rekeying to be performed through 4-way
handshake in an association started through FT protocol.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to avoid leaving some timers (e.g., for PTK rekeying)
running afrer a STA has disassociated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
FT rules for PTK derivation do not use PMK. Remove the unused argument
to the PTK derivation function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
There is no PMK/PMKID when going through 4-way handshake during an
association started with FT protocol, so need to allow the operation to
proceed even if there is no selected PMKSA cache entry in place.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The PMK and PMKID information from FILS ERP and FILS PMKSA caching needs
to be stored within struct wpa_state_machine for PTK to work. Without
this, PTK derivation would fail and attempt to go through rekeying would
result in disconnection. Furthermore, wpa_rekey_ptk() timer needs to be
started at the completion of FILS association since the place where it
was done for non-FILS cases at the end of 4-way handshake is not reached
when FILS authentication is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
All nla_put*() operations should be verified to succeed, so check this
recently added one for NL80211_ATTR_EXTERNAL_AUTH_SUPPORT.
Fixes: 236e793e7b ("nl80211: External authentication in driver-based AP SME mode")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit 4b16c15bbc ("EAP-pwd server: Use os_get_random() for
unpredictable token") replaced use of os_random(), i.e., of random(),
with os_get_random(), but forgot to remove the now unused srandom()
call. Clean up the implementation and remove that unneeded code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Unexpected fragment might result in data->inbuf not being allocated
before processing and that could have resulted in NULL pointer
dereference. Fix that by explicitly checking for data->inbuf to be
available before using it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
data->inbuf allocation might fail and if that were to happen, the next
fragment in the exchange could have resulted in NULL pointer
dereference. Unexpected fragment with more bit might also be able to
trigger this. Fix that by explicitly checking for data->inbuf to be
available before using it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Report failure from getKey() if MSK cannot be derived due to unexpected
sha1_vector() local failure.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
There are number of deployed APs with broken PMF implementation where
the IGTK KDE uses swapped bytes in the KeyID field (0x0400 and 0x0500
instead of 4 and 5). Such APs cannot be trusted to implement BIP
correctly or provide a valid IGTK, so do not try to configure this key
with swapped KeyID bytes. Instead, continue without configuring the IGTK
so that the driver can drop any received group-addressed robust
management frames due to missing keys.
Normally, this error behavior would result in us disconnecting, but
there are number of deployed APs with this broken behavior, so as an
interoperability workaround, allow the connection to proceed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously wpa_supplicant_key_neg_complete() was called before the
attempt to configure the IGTK received from the authenticator. This
could resulted in somewhat surprising sequence of events if IGTK
configuration failed since completion event would be followed by
immediate disconnection event. Reorder these operations so that
completion is reported only if GTK and IGTK are configurated
successfully.
Furthermore, check for missing GTK KDE in case of RSN and handle that
with an explicit disconnection instead of waiting for the AP to deliver
the GTK later.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When processing the NL80211_CMD_PROBE_CLIENT command response, the
nl80211 layer in the kernel sends a response containing the cookie
associated with the client probe request. This response was not handled
by driver_nl80211.c when sending the command, and it was mistakenly
handled as an asynchronous event. This incorrect event did not include
the MAC/ACK attributes, so it was ignored in practice, but nevertheless,
the command response should not be processed as an event.
Fix this by reading the response as part of the sending the command
flow.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Include the MAC address of the peer, knowledge of whether the poll was
ACKed, and cookie into the debug message to make this more useful.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like it is possible for the RECEIVE state to leak memory where
a previously allocated sm->lki is moved to sm->oki while sm->oki is
pointing to not yet freed entry. It is not clear how this can be
triggered, but it has come up in hwsim testing under heavy load.
Free sm->oki if it is still set in RECEIVE before replacing it with
sm->lki to avoid this memory leak.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It is possible for the SAE state machine to remove the STA and free the
sta pointer in the mesh use cases. handle_auth_sae() could have
dereferenced that pointer and used freed memory in some cases. Fix that
by explicitly checking whether the STA was removed.
Fixes: bb598c3bdd ("AP: Add support for full station state")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
ap_free_sta() frees the sta entry, so sta->addr cannot be used after
that call. Fix the sequence of these two calls to avoid use of freed
memory to determine which PMKSA cache entry to remove.
Fixes: 9f2cf23e2e ("mesh: Add support for PMKSA caching")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Move event.assoc_info.freq selection to be after the
nl80211_get_assoc_ssid() call so that the current cfg80211 information
on the operating channel can be used should anything unexpected have
happened between the association request and completion of association.
Furthermore, update bss->freq based on assoc_freq to make that
information a bit more useful for station mode. It was already updated
after channel switches during association, but not at the beginning of
association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes some issues where bss->freq could have been used to replace
the current operating channel when sending out a management frame.
bss->freq has not been consistently used to track the current operating
channel in station mode, so it should not be trusted for this type of
uses. Clearing it makes this a bit more robust by at least avoiding the
cases of information from past association being used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
None of the ECC groups supported in the implementation had a cofactor
greater than 1, so these checks are unreachable and for all cases, the
cofactor is known to be 1. Furthermore, RFC 5931 explicitly disallow use
of ECC groups with cofactor larger than 1, so this checks cannot be
needed for any curve that is compliant with the RFC.
Remove the unneeded group cofactor checks to simplify the
implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Based on the SAE implementation guidance update to not allow ECC groups
with a prime that is under 256 bits, reject groups 25, 26, and 27 in
EAP-pwd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list() command alone is not sufficient
to enable ECDH curve selection with older OpenSSL versions for TLS
server, so enable automatic selection first and specify the exact list
of curves after that.
This fixes failures in openssl_ecdh_curves test case when hostapd uses
OpenSSL 1.0.2.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The external authentication command and event does not need to copy the
BSSID/SSID values into struct external_auth since those values are used
before returning from the call. Simplify this by using const u8 * to
external data instead of the array with a copy of the external data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend commit 5ff39c1380 ("SAE: Support external authentication
offload for driver-SME cases") to support external authentication
with drivers that implement AP SME by notifying the status of
SAE authentication to the driver after SAE handshake as the
driver acts as a pass through for the SAE Authentication frames.
Signed-off-by: Srinivas Dasari <dasaris@codeaurora.org>
This extends driver interface to nl80211 by introducing the following
changes,
1. Register for Authenication frames in driver-based AP SME mode.
2. Advertise NL80211_ATTR_EXTERNAL_AUTH_SUPPORT in set_ap when
offloaded SAE authentication is supported.
3. Extend the NL80211_CMD_EXTERNAL_AUTH interface to also send PMKID
so that the drivers can respond to the PMKSA cached connection
attempts from the stations avoiding the need to contact user space
for all PMKID-based connections.
4. Send external auth status to driver only if it is a driver based
SME solution.
Signed-off-by: Srinivas Dasari <dasaris@codeaurora.org>
beacon_set_done did not get reset to zero on disabling interface using
DISABLE control interface command and the subsequent ENABLE command will
caused configuration of Beacon/Probe Response/Association Response frame
IEs twice. The unnecessary two step configuration can be avoided by
resetting beacon_set_done on DISABLE so that ENABLE can bring up the
interface in a single step with fully updated IEs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Binary presentations of element and scalar can be written directly to
the allocated commit message buffer instead of having to first write
them into temporary buffers just to copy them to the actual message
buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
RFC 5931 has these conditions as MUST requirements, so better follow
them explicitly even if the rand,mask == 0 or rand+mask == 0 or 1 cases
are very unlikely to occur in practice while generating random values
locally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds an explicit check for 0 < x,y < prime based on RFC 5931,
2.8.5.2.2 requirement. The earlier checks might have covered this
implicitly, but it is safer to avoid any dependency on implicit checks
and specific crypto library behavior. (CVE-2019-9498 and CVE-2019-9499)
Furthermore, this moves the EAP-pwd element and scalar parsing and
validation steps into shared helper functions so that there is no need
to maintain two separate copies of this common functionality between the
server and peer implementations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When processing an EAP-pwd Commit frame, the server's scalar and element
(elliptic curve point) were not validated. This allowed an adversary to
bypass authentication, and act as a rogue Access Point (AP) if the
crypto implementation did not verify the validity of the EC point.
Fix this vulnerability by assuring the received scalar lies within the
valid range, and by checking that the received element is not the point
at infinity and lies on the elliptic curve being used. (CVE-2019-9499)
The vulnerability is only exploitable if OpenSSL version 1.0.2 or lower
is used, or if LibreSSL or wolfssl is used. Newer versions of OpenSSL
(and also BoringSSL) implicitly validate the elliptic curve point in
EC_POINT_set_affine_coordinates_GFp(), preventing the attack.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <mathy.vanhoef@nyu.edu>
When processing an EAP-pwd Commit frame, verify that the peer's scalar
and elliptic curve element differ from the one sent by the server. This
prevents reflection attacks where the adversary reflects the scalar and
element sent by the server. (CVE-2019-9497)
The vulnerability allows an adversary to complete the EAP-pwd handshake
as any user. However, the adversary does not learn the negotiated
session key, meaning the subsequent 4-way handshake would fail. As a
result, this cannot be abused to bypass authentication unless EAP-pwd is
used in non-WLAN cases without any following key exchange that would
require the attacker to learn the MSK.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <mathy.vanhoef@nyu.edu>
When processing an EAP-pwd Commit frame, the peer's scalar and element
(elliptic curve point) were not validated. This allowed an adversary to
bypass authentication, and impersonate any user if the crypto
implementation did not verify the validity of the EC point.
Fix this vulnerability by assuring the received scalar lies within the
valid range, and by checking that the received element is not the point
at infinity and lies on the elliptic curve being used. (CVE-2019-9498)
The vulnerability is only exploitable if OpenSSL version 1.0.2 or lower
is used, or if LibreSSL or wolfssl is used. Newer versions of OpenSSL
(and also BoringSSL) implicitly validate the elliptic curve point in
EC_POINT_set_affine_coordinates_GFp(), preventing the attack.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <mathy.vanhoef@nyu.edu>
Explicitly verify that own and peer commit scalar/element are available
when trying to check SAE confirm message. It could have been possible to
hit a NULL pointer dereference if the peer element could not have been
parsed. (CVE-2019-9496)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Try to avoid showing externally visible timing or memory access
differences regardless of whether the derived pwd-value is smaller than
the group prime.
This is related to CVE-2019-9494.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is an initial step towards making the FFC case use strictly
constant time operations similarly to the ECC case.
sae_test_pwd_seed_ffc() does not yet have constant time behavior,
though.
This is related to CVE-2019-9494.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These groups have significant probability of coming up with pwd-value
that is equal or greater than the prime and as such, need for going
through the PWE derivation loop multiple times. This can result in
sufficient timing different to allow an external observer to determine
how many rounds are needed and that can leak information about the used
password.
Force at least 40 loop rounds for these MODP groups similarly to the ECC
group design to mask timing. This behavior is not described in IEEE Std
802.11-2016 for SAE, but it does not result in different values (i.e.,
only different timing), so such implementation specific countermeasures
can be done without breaking interoperability with other implementation.
Note: These MODP groups 22, 23, and 24 are not considered sufficiently
strong to be used with SAE (or more or less anything else). As such,
they should never be enabled in runtime configuration for any production
use cases. These changes to introduce additional protection to mask
timing is only for completeness of implementation and not an indication
that these groups should be used.
This is related to CVE-2019-9494.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make the non-failure path in the function proceed without branches based
on r_odd and in constant time to minimize risk of observable differences
in timing or cache use. (CVE-2019-9494)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The QR test result can provide information about the password to an
attacker, so try to minimize differences in how the
sae_test_pwd_seed_ecc() result is used. (CVE-2019-9494)
Use heap memory for the dummy password to allow the same password length
to be used even with long passwords.
Use constant time selection functions to track the real vs. dummy
variables so that the exact same operations can be performed for both QR
test results.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This algorithm could leak information to external observers in form of
timing differences or memory access patterns (cache use). While the
previous implementation had protection against the most visible timing
differences (looping 40 rounds and masking the legendre operation), it
did not protect against memory access patterns between the two possible
code paths in the masking operations. That might be sufficient to allow
an unprivileged process running on the same device to be able to
determine which path is being executed through a cache attack and based
on that, determine information about the used password.
Convert the PWE finding loop to use constant time functions and
identical memory access path without different branches for the QR/QNR
cases to minimize possible side-channel information similarly to the
changes done for SAE authentication. (CVE-2019-9495)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Get rid of the branches that depend on the result of the Legendre
operation. This is needed to avoid leaking information about different
temporary results in blinding mechanisms.
This is related to CVE-2019-9494 and CVE-2019-9495.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These functions can be used to help implement constant time operations
for various cryptographic operations that must minimize externally
observable differences in processing (both in timing and also in
internal cache use, etc.).
This is related to CVE-2019-9494 and CVE-2019-9495.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This helps in reducing measurable timing differences in operations
involving private information. BoringSSL has removed BN_FLG_CONSTTIME
and expects specific constant time functions to be called instead, so a
bit different approach is needed depending on which library is used.
The main operation that needs protection against side channel attacks is
BN_mod_exp() that depends on private keys (the public key validation
step in crypto_dh_derive_secret() is an exception that can use the
faster version since it does not depend on private keys).
crypto_bignum_div() is currently used only in SAE FFC case with not
safe-prime groups and only with values that do not depend on private
keys, so it is not critical to protect it.
crypto_bignum_inverse() is currently used only in SAE FFC PWE
derivation. The additional protection here is targeting only OpenSSL.
BoringSSL may need conversion to using BN_mod_inverse_blinded().
This is related to CVE-2019-9494 and CVE-2019-9495.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These wpa_supplicant network profile parameters could be used to specify
a single match string that would be used against the dNSName items in
subjectAltName or CN. There may be use cases where more than one
alternative match string would be useful, so extend these to allow a
semicolon delimited list of values to be used (e.g.,
"example.org;example.com"). If any of the specified values matches any
of the dNSName/CN values in the server certificate, consider the
certificate as meeting this requirement.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Incorrect gen->type value was used to check whether subjectAltName
contained dNSName entries. This resulted in all domain_match and
domain_suffix_match entries failing to find a match and rejecting the
server certificate. Fix this by checking against the correct type
definition for dNSName.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously the EAP user database had to include a wildcard entry for ERP
to work since the keyName-NAI as User-Name in Access-Request would not
be recognized without such wildcard entry (that could point to any EAP
method). This is not ideal, so add a separate check to allow any stored
ERP keyName-NAI to be used for ERP without any requirement for the EAP
user database to contain a matching entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Inclusion of common/dpp.h into hostapd/main.c brought in an undesired
unconditional dependency on OpenSSL header files even for builds where
DPP is not enabled. Fix this by making the dpp.h contents, and in
particular the inclusion of openssl/x509.h, conditional on CONFIG_DPP.
Fixes: 87d8435cf9 ("DPP: Common configurator/bootstrapping data management")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The rules defining which DH groups are suitable for SAE use were
accepted into IEEE 802.11 REVmd based on this document:
https://mentor.ieee.org/802.11/dcn/19/11-19-0387-02-000m-addressing-some-sae-comments.docx
Enforce those rules in production builds of wpa_supplicant and hostapd.
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds can still be used to select any o the
implemented groups to maintain testing coverage.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
identity_buf may be NULL here. Handle this case explicitly by printing
"N/A" instead relying on snprintf converting this to "(null)" or some
other value based on unexpected NULL pointer.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
While commit 1c156e783d ("Fixed tls_prf() to handle keys with
odd length") added support for keys with odd length, the function
never reached this code as the function would return earlier in
case the key length was odd. Fix this by removing the first check
for the key length.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
This commit introduces an attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ROAM_AUTH_REASON to carry the roam reason code
through QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_KEY_MGMT_ROAM_AUTH event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Avoid duplicated code in each user of dpp_build_conf_req() by moving the
common encapsulation case into this helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When connected using FT-SAE key mgmt, use PMK from PMKSA cache as XXKey
for PMK-R0 and PMK-R1 derivations. This fixes an issue where FT key
hierarchy could not be established due to missing (not yet configured)
XXKey when using SAE PMKSA caching for the initial mobility domain
association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
In the case of the driver not supporting full AP mode STA state (i.e.,
not adding a STA entry before association), the QoS parameters are not
allowed to be modified when going through (re)association exchange for a
STA entry that has not been removed from the kernel. cfg80211 would
reject such command to update STA flags, so do not add the WMM parameter
in this case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Ethernet frames have minimum length of 64 octets and shorter frames may
end up getting arbitrary padding in the end. This would result in the
FT/RRB receiver rejecting the frame as an incorrectly protected one.
Work around this by padding the message so that it is never shorter than
the minimum Ethernet frame.
Unfortunately, this padding is apparently not enough with all Ethernet
devices and it is still possible to see extra two octet padding at the
end of the message even if larger frames are used (e.g., showed up with
128 byte frames). For now, work around this by trying to do AES-SIV
decryption with two octets shorter frame (ignore last two octets) if the
first attempt fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Merge the practically copy-pasted implementations in wpa_supplicant and
hostapd into a single shared implementation in dpp.c for managing
configurator and boostrapping information. This avoid unnecessary code
duplication and provides a convenient location for adding new global DPP
data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The memcpy calls added for exposing the PMK from wpa_auth module could
end up trying to copy the same memory buffer on top of itself.
Overlapping memory areas are not allowed with memcpy, so this could
result in undefined behavior. Fix this by making the copies conditional
on the updated value actually coming from somewhere else.
Fixes: b08c9ad0c7 ("AP: Expose PMK outside of wpa_auth module")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The offset update for copying KEK2 from the extended PTK was overriding
the offset instead of incrementing it (a likely copy-paste error from
the first offset assignment based on KCK). This resulted in KEK2 being
set to incorrect segment of PTK. Fix this by updating the offset
properly so that KEK2 is copied from the correct place at the end of the
PTK.
Fixes: 2f37387812 ("FILS: Add more complete support for FT-FILS use cases")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
SSL_use_certificate_chain_file() is not available in the current
BoringSSL even though the defined OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER is large enough
to claim that this function would be present in the OpenSSL API.
Fall back to using SSL_use_certificate_file() with BoringSSL to fix the
build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This code was after the FILS handling that would have encrypted the
frame. While FILS and OWE are never used together, the OWE handling
should really be before the FILS handling since no IEs can be added
after the FILS encryption step. In addition, the Diffie-Hellman
Parameter element is not a Vendor Specific element, so it should be
before some of the Vendor Specific elements even though it is not
defined in IEEE 802.11.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use Diffie-Hellman key exchange to derivate additional material for
PMK-to-PTK derivation to get PFS. The Diffie-Hellman Parameter element
(defined in OWE RFC 8110) is used in association frames to exchange the
DH public keys. For backwards compatibility, ignore missing
request/response DH parameter and fall back to no PFS in such cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
DPP allows Diffie-Hellman exchange to be used for PFS in PTK derivation.
This requires an additional Z.x (x coordinate of the DH shared secret)
to be passed to wpa_pmk_to_ptk(). This commit adds that to the function
and updates all the callers to pass NULL,0 for that part in preparation
of the DPP specific changes to start using this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous OWE implementation on the AP side rejected any
(Re)Association Request frame with the Diffie-Hellman Parameter element
if AKM was not OWE. This breaks compatibility with DPP PFS, so relax
that rule to allow DPP AKM to be used as well. While this commit alone
does not add support for PFS, this allows interoperability between
non-PFS implementation on the AP and a newer PFS implementation on the
STA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Allow an additional context value to be passed to TLS exporter as
specified in RFC 5705 section 4.
This does not yet implement it for the internal TLS implementation.
However, as currently nothing uses context yet, this will not break
anything right now. WolfSSL maintainers also stated that they are not
going to add context support yet, but would look into it if/when this is
required by a published draft or a standard.
Signed-off-by: Ervin Oro <ervin.oro@aalto.fi>
This allows devices supporting DPP protocol version 2 or newer to
provision networks that enable both the legacy (PSK/SAE) and DPP
credentials.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Share a single parsing implementation for both hostapd and
wpa_supplicant to avoid code duplication. In addition, clean up the
implementation to be more easily extensible.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
X509_get_subject_name() in OpenSSL 1.0.2 does not mark its argument as a
const pointer, so need to type cast this to avoid a build warning.
Fixes: 841205a1ce ("OpenSSL: Add 'check_cert_subject' support for TLS server")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The queue_len * 50 ms wait time was too large with the retransmission
timeouts used in the mesh case for SAE. The maximum wait of 750 ms was
enough to prevent successful completion of authentication after having
hit the maximum queue length. While the previous commit is enough to
allow this to complete successfully in couple of retries, it looks like
a smaller wait time should be used here even if it means potentially
using more CPU.
Drop the processing wait time to queue_len * 10 ms so that the maximum
wait time is 150 ms if the queue is full.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous design of simply queuing all SAE commit messages was not
exactly good at allowing recovery from a flooding state if the valid
peer used frequent retransmissions of the SAE message. This could
happen, e.g., with mesh BSSs using SAE. The frequent retransmissions and
restarts of SAE authentication combined with SAE confirm messages
bypassing the queue ended up in not being able to finish SAE exchange
successfully.
Fix this by modifying the queuing policy to queue SAE confirm messages
if there is a queued SAE commit message from the same peer so that the
messages within the same exchange do not get reordered. In addition,
replace queued SAE commit/confirm message if a new matching message is
received from the same peer STA. This is useful for the case where the
peer restarts SAE more quickly than the local end has time to process
the queued messages.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use this new message from Enrollee to Configurator to indicate result of
the config object provisioning if both devices support protocol version
2 or newer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not set sm->timer_tick_enabled if the eloop_register_timeout() call
fails so that the next attempt to enable the timer in
eapol_enable_timer_tick() can try to recover from unexpected eloop
failures. This should not really be needed in practical use cases, but
certain out-of-memory test cases can trigger allocation failure in
eloop_register_timeout() and if that happens, the previous EAPOL
supplicant state machine implementation got pretty much completely stuck
for any operation needing the timer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Verify that the AP uses matching PMKR1Name in (Re)Association Response
frame when going through FT initial mobility domain association using
FILS. Thise step was missing from the initial implementation, but is
needed to match the IEEE 802.11ai requirements for explicit confirmation
of the FT key hierarchy (similarly to what is done in FT 4-way handshake
when FILS is not used).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Derive PMKR1Name during the FILS authentication step, verify that the
station uses matching PMKR1Name in (Re)Association Request frame, and
add RSNE[PMKR1Name] into (Re)Association Response frame when going
through FT initial mobility domain association using FILS. These steps
were missed from the initial implementation, but are needed to match the
IEEE 802.11ai requirements for explicit confirmation of the FT key
hierarchy (similarly to what is done in FT 4-way handshake when FILS is
not used).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This gets rid of a confusing error message "FILS: Failed to add PMKSA
cache entry based on ERP" for cases where PMKSA caching is disabled in
hostapd (disable_pmksa_caching=1). Functionality remains unchanged,
i.e., no cache entry was added before this change either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
NL80211_CMD_GET_KEY response may return the actual key in addition to
the last used sequence number that we need. That might result in a key
being left in unused heap memory after the buffer is freed.
Explicitly clear the message payload with the possibly included key
material from heap memory before returning from the handler function
(and having libnl free the nlmsg) when key information is obtained from
the driver using the NL80211_CMD_GET_KEY command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a check in nl80211 driver layer to not include PMK while sending
NL80211_CMD_DEL_PMKSA explicitly. Though it is taken care already in
supplicant layer by setting the pmk_len to zero, it would be good
to have a check in nl80211 layer in order to avoid future accidental
inclusions of keying material in commands that do not need them.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Send out the new Protocol Version attribute in Authentication
Request/Response messages and determine the peer version based on this
attribute.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
hostapd configuration parameters fragm_threshold and rts_threshold were
documented to disable the threshold with value -1 and not change driver
configuration if the parameter is not included. However, -1 was mapped
into not changing the driver value, so the explicit disabling part did
not work.
Replace the default values for these to be -2 so that explicitly set
configuration value -1 can be distinguished from the case of not
including the parameter. Map the -1 value to a driver request to disable
the threshold. Ignore any error from this operation just in case to
avoid breaking functionality should some drivers not accept the (u32) -1
value as a threshold value request to disable the mechanism.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This subcommand is used to update Zigbee state and specified WLAN
durations to enhance success ratio of Zigbee joining network. The
attributes defined in enum qca_mpta_helper_vendor_attr are used to
deliver these parameters to the driver.
Signed-off-by: stonez <stonez@codeaurora.org>
Peer rate statistics is per-peer cached data in the driver. These
statistics needs to be flushed to a user space application on
synchronous/asynchronous events. This command is used as an event from
the driver to flush per-peer cached statistics to the application.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This patch added 'check_cert_subject' support to match the value of
every field against the DN of the subject in the client certificate. If
the values do not match, the certificate verification will fail and will
reject the user.
This option allows hostapd to match every individual field in the right
order, also allow '*' character as a wildcard (e.g OU=Development*).
Note: hostapd will match string up to 'wildcard' against the DN of the
subject in the client certificate for every individual field.
Signed-off-by: Paresh Chaudhary <paresh.chaudhary@rockwellcollins.com>
Signed-off-by: Jared Bents <jared.bents@rockwellcollins.com>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These parameters were using the u8*/len style types even though they
were used as char* strings without an explicit length field. Make this
char* instead of u8* to avoid confusion and unnecessary type casting.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This gets rid of some static analyzer warnings about uninitialized
variables being used in comparisons or write operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Include only one of hostapd_mgmt_rx() and hostapd_action_rx() functions
in the build. Previously, NEED_AP_MLME builds (i.e., cases where hostapd
AP MLME implementation is included) included both of these functions and
both were tried in sequence. In addition to being difficult to
understand, that could result in unexpected behavior if
hostapd_mgmt_rx() rejected a frame and return 0 to allow
hostapd_action_rx() to attempt to process the frame.
All the operations included in hostapd_action_rx() are supposed to be
available through the hostapd_mgmt_rx() call in handle_action() and
those should result in the exact same Category/Action-based handler
function to be called in the end. As such, this should not result in
different behavior. And if there is a difference, that would be pointing
at a hidden bug that would need to be fixed anyway. Furthermore, builds
without NEED_AP_MLME would not have any difference in behavior or
contents of the binary either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to go through the following handler calls in
hostapd_action_rx() after having found the matching WLAN_ACTION_WNM
handler.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd_action_rx() was pointing at incorrect field (Action vs.
Category) for the wpa_ft_action_rx() call and the length check for SA
Query Action frames. This resulted in those frames getting dropped as
invalid (FT) or ignored as truncated (SA Query). Fix this by pointing to
the correct place at the beginning of the frame body.
This issue had a long history. These were broken during cleanup in
commit dbfb8e82ff ("Remove unnecessary EVENT_RX_ACTION") which
actually fixed the initial reason for the error accidentally. It was
just that that error was needed to cancel out another earlier error..
One of the errors came from misuse of the EVENT_RX_ACTION API in commit
deca6eff74 ("atheros: Add new IEEE 802.11r driver_ops"). That pointed
struct rx_action data/len to cover the Action frame from the Category
field to the end of the frame body while the API was documented to cover
Action field to the end of the frame body. This error was cancelled by
another error in commit 88b32a99d3 ("FT: Add FT AP support for drivers
that manage MLME internally") that called wpa_ft_action_rx() with the
struct rx_action::data field as the second argument. That argument needs
to point to the Category field, but that struct rx_action field was
supposed to point to the Action field.
Number of the Action frame handlers added into hostapd_action_rx() had
been fixed more or less accidentally after this in various other
commits, but the FT and SA Query handlers had ended up maintaining the
incorrect operations. This is now fixing those.
This seems to fix at least some cases of FT-over-DS with drivers that
use driver-based AP MLME. Such drivers might use internal SA Query
processing, so it is not clear whether that part actually fixes any real
issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The struct hostapd_eap_user changes with a new allocated variable were
not covered in the RADIUS server code. Fix this by using eap_user_free()
instead of custom memory freeing operation in radius_server.c.
The hwsim tests with salted password (ap_wpa2_eap_pwd_salt_sha1,
ap_wpa2_eap_pwd_salt_sha256, ap_wpa2_eap_pwd_salt_sha512) triggered
these memory leaks.
Fixes: d52ead3db7 ("EAP-pwd server: Add support for salted password databases")
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Copy the Finite Cyclic Group field value from the request to the
response Authentication frame if we end up rejecting the request due to
unsupported group.
IEEE Std 802.11-2016 has conflicting statements about this behavior.
Table 9-36 (Presence of fields and elements in Authentication frames)
indicates that the Finite Cyclic Group field is only included with
status code values 0 (success) and 76 (anti-clogging token request)
while SAE protocol description implying that the Finite Cyclic Group
field is set to the rejected group (12.4.8.6.3 and 12.4.8.6.4).
The standard language needs to cleaned up to describe this
unambiguously, but since it looks safe to add the field into the
rejection case and since there is desire to have the field present to be
able to implement what exactly is stated in 12.4.8.6.4, it looks
reasonable to move ahead with the AP mode implementation change. There
is no change in wpa_supplicant for now to modify its behavior based on
whether this field is present, i.e., wpa_supplicant will continue to
work with both the old and new hostapd behavior for SAE group
negotiation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
tmp2 (y^2) was derived once in each iteration of the loop and only freed
after all the loop iterations. Fix this by freeing the temporary value
during each iteration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new hostapd configuration parameter wps_cred_add_sae=1 can be used
to request hostapd to add SAE configuration whenever WPS is used to
configure the AP to use WPA2-PSK and the credential includes a
passphrase (instead of PSK). This can be used to enable WPA3-Personal
transition mode with both SAE and PSK enabled and PMF enabled for PSK
and required for SAE associations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new QCA vendor specific feature capability indication for the
device to indicate the support of TWT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The current/default behavior of set blacklist BSSID QCA vendor command
is a mandate to the driver - do not consider this BSSID for connect/roam
till reset.
There are use cases where this need not be a mandate and thus could
provide the flexibility for the driver to consider this BSSID if there
are no better ones. Such use cases can use this new flag attribute to
only hint the blacklist of a BSSID to the driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not start SAE authentication from scratch if a STA starts a new
attempt for the same group while we still have previously generated PWE
available. Instead, use the previously generated PWE as-is and skip
anti-clogging token exchange since the heavy processing is already
completed. This saves unnecessary processing on the AP side in case the
STA failed to complete authentication on the first attempt (e.g., due to
heavy SAE load on the AP causing a timeout) and makes it more likely for
a valid STA to be able to complete SAE authentication during a DoS
attack.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not start SAE authentication from scratch when the AP requests
anti-clogging token to be used. Instead, use the previously generated
PWE as-is if the retry is for the same AP and the same group. This saves
unnecessary processing on the station side in case the AP is under heavy
SAE authentiation load.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a 16-bit token index into the anti-clogging token. This can be used
to enforce only a single use of each issued anti-clogging token request.
The token value is now token-index |
last-30-octets-of(HMAC-SHA256(sae_token_key, STA-MAC-address |
token-index)), i.e., the first two octets of the SHA256 hash value are
replaced with the token-index and token-index itself is protected as
part of the HMAC context data.
Track the used 16-bit token index values and accept received tokens only
if they use an index value that has been requested, but has not yet been
used. This makes it a bit more difficult for an attacker to perform DoS
attacks against the heavy CPU operations needed for processing SAE
commit since the attacker cannot simply replay the same frame multiple
times and instead, needs to request each token separately.
While this does not add significant extra processing/CPU need for the
attacker, this can be helpful in combination with the queued processing
of SAE commit messages in enforcing more delay during flooding of SAE
commit messages since the new anti-clogging token values are not
returned before the new message goes through the processing queue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows better control of processing new SAE sessions so that other
operations can be given higher priority during bursts of SAE requests,
e.g., during a potential DoS attack. The receive commit messages are
queued (up to maximum of 15 entries) and processed from eloop callback.
If the queue has multiple pending entries, more wait time is used to go
through the each new entry to reduce heavy CPU load from SAE processing.
Enable anti-clogging token use also based on the pending commit message
queue and not only based on the already started sessions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Change the AP mode default for SAE to enable only the group 19 instead
of enabling all ECC groups that are supported by the used crypto library
and the SAE implementations. The main reason for this is to avoid
enabling groups that are not as strong as the mandatory-to-support group
19 (i.e., groups 25 and 26). In addition, this disables heavier groups
by default.
In addition, add a warning about MODP groups 1, 2, 5, 22, 23, and 24
based on "MUST NOT" or "SHOULD NOT" categorization in RFC 8247. All the
MODP groups were already disabled by default and would have needed
explicit configuration to be allowed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Pass the group order (if known/specified) to crypto_dh_derive_secret()
(and also to OpenSSL DH_generate_key() in case of Group 5) and verify
that the public key received from the peer meets 1 < pubkey < p and
pubkey^q == 1 mod p conditions.
While all these use cases were using only ephemeral DH keys, it is
better to use more explicit checks while deriving the shared secret to
avoid unexpected behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extension of VLAN assignment code had a bug in one of the code
paths where vlan_id could have been left uninitialized. This could
result in SAE authentication getting rejected in cases where VLAN
assignment is not used if the uninitialized stack memory had nonzero
value.
Fixes: dbfa691df4 ("VLAN assignment based on used WPA/WPA2 passphrase/PSK")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use unsigned 1 (1U) instead of signed (1) when doing left shift that
could potentially need to use all bits of the 32-bit unsigned variable.
radius_server.c:2254:14: runtime error: left shift of 1 by 31 places cannot be represented in type 'int'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid an unnecessary unsigned integer overflow warning due to loop index
j-- use.
hostapd.c:661:10: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'unsigned int'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
ie.wps_ie is an array, so there is no point in checking whether it is
NULL.
driver_atheros.c:1221:9: error: address of array 'ie.wps_ie' will
always evaluate to 'true' [-Werror,-Wpointer-bool-conversion]
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
(&mgmt->u.deauth.reason_code + 1) is not exactly clean and now that we
have the u8 variable[] member in the struct after this field, use that
directly to avoid clang compiler warning:
ctrl_iface_ap.c:454:18: error: taking address of packed member
'reason_code' of class or structure 'ieee80211_mgmt::(anonymous
union)::(anonymous)' may result in an unaligned pointer value
[-Werror,-Waddress-of-packed-member]
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
FST_MAX_LLT_MS definition depended on undefined behavior with unsigned
integer overflow. Avoid that and also optimize the
FST_LLT_{MS_TO_VAL,VAL_TO_MS} macros to handle larger values without
overflowing 32-bit unsigned integers.
fst_session.c:1274:52: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 4294967295 * 32 cannot be represented in type 'unsigned int'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Split the check and decrementation into separate steps to avoid an
unnecessary UBSan warning.
hostapd.c:1895:14: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'size_t' (aka 'unsigned long')
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hapd->conf might be NULL in case initialized failed, so better be
prepared for that when debug printing interface name in the deinit path.
hostapd.c:312:54: runtime error: member access within null pointer of type 'struct hostapd_bss_config'
hostapd.c:351:29: runtime error: member access within null pointer of type 'struct hostapd_bss_config'
hostapd.c:2158:18: runtime error: member access within null pointer of type 'struct hostapd_bss_config'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a constraint on the base64 encoded buffer length to avoid an integer
overflow in the output length calculation.
common.c:1087:16: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'size_t' (aka 'unsigned long')
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Split the if/while loop condition into two independent steps so that
in_size-- happens only in the case in_size is nonzero. This gets rid of
unnecessary UBSan warnings.
common.c:1087:16: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'size_t' (aka 'unsigned long')
common.c:1076:16: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'size_t' (aka 'unsigned long')
common.c:1119:16: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'size_t' (aka 'unsigned long')
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This results in an UBSan warning that can be avoided easily.
os_unix.c:524:3: runtime error: null pointer passed as argument 2, which is declared to never be null
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
ext_supp_rates_len would be 0 here, so decrementing it by 2 will result
in unsigned integer overflow even if that result is not actually used
anywhere. Avoid that to get rid of the UBSan warning.
tdls.c:1597:27: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 2 cannot be represented in type 'unsigned long'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is needed to avoid an UBSan warning and since this struct is used
as part of a message construction, it needs to be packed anyway to
guarantee correct functionality.
ieee802_1x_kay.c:1021:3: runtime error: member access within misaligned address 0x0000031921e2 for type 'struct ieee802_1x_mka_peer_id', which requires 4 byte alignment
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
iface->num_bss is unsigned integer, so need to explicit typecast it to
unsigned before decrementation by one even when the result is stored in
an unsigned integer.
../src/ap/hostapd.c:2185:26: runtime error: unsigned integer overflow: 0 - 1 cannot be represented in type 'unsigned long'
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
UBSan testing with WPA_TRACE=y ended up hitting an unaligned access for
struct os_alloc_trace in os_program_deinit() because of the
dl_list_for_each() design that looked like dereferencing the member
element of the list head which is something that does not exist.
Get the first entry from the list using dl_list_first() so that the
empty list special case is covefred and compare item pointers instead of
struct dl_list pointers to check whether the end of the loop has been
reached.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can result in compiler warnings due to the unexpected NULL pointer
as a source memory even when the length of the copied data is 0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
According to IEEE Std 802.11-2016, 9.4.2.25 when fields of an RSNE are
not included, the default values are used. The cipher suite defaults
were hardcoded to CCMP in the previous implementation, but the default
is actually different for DMG: GCMP (per 9.4.2.25.2).
It is not possible to find out from the RSNE if the network is non-DMG
or DMG, so callers of wpa_parse_wpa_ie_rsn() need to handle this case
based on context, which can be different for each caller.
In order to fix this issue, add flags to the wpa_ie_data indicating
whether pairwise/group ciphers were included in the RSNE. Callers can
check these flags and fill in the appropriate ciphers. The
wpa_parse_wpa_ie_rsn() function still initializes the ciphers to CCMP by
default so existing callers will not break. This change also fixes some
callers which need to handle the DMG network case.
Signed-off-by: Lior David <liord@codeaurora.org>
This new QCA vendor attribute adds provision to specify the
ethernet protocol id from userspace to the packets which are
offloaded to the driver/firmware (e.g., IPv4, IPv6).
Signed-off-by: Arun Kumar Khandavalli <akhandav@codeaurora.org>
The Wi-Fi Alliance Multi-AP Specification v1.0 allows onboarding of a
backhaul STA through WPS. To enable this, the WPS Registrar offers a
different set of credentials (backhaul credentials instead of fronthaul
credentials) when the Multi-AP subelement is present in the WFA vendor
extension element of the WSC M1 message.
Add new configuration options to specify the backhaul credentials for
the hostapd internal registrar: multi_ap_backhaul_ssid,
multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_psk, multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_passphrase. These are
only relevant for a fronthaul SSID, i.e., where multi_ap is set to 2 or
3. When these options are set, pass the backhaul credentials instead of
the normal credentials when the Multi-AP subelement is present.
Ignore the Multi-AP subelement if the backhaul config options are not
set. Note that for an SSID which is fronthaul and backhaul at the same
time (i.e., multi_ap == 3), this results in the correct credentials
being sent anyway.
The security to be used for the backaul BSS is fixed to WPA2PSK. The
Multi-AP Specification only allows Open and WPA2PSK networks to be
configured. Although not stated explicitly, the backhaul link is
intended to be always encrypted, hence WPA2PSK.
To build the credentials, the credential-building code is essentially
copied and simplified. Indeed, the backhaul credentials are always
WPA2PSK and never use per-device PSK. All the options set for the
fronthaul BSS WPS are simply ignored.
Signed-off-by: Davina Lu <ylu@quantenna.com>
Signed-off-by: Igor Mitsyanko <igor.mitsyanko.os@quantenna.com>
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
Cc: Marianna Carrera <marianna.carrera.so@quantenna.com>
The Wi-Fi Alliance Multi-AP Specification v1.0 allows onboarding of a
backhaul STA through WPS. To enable this, the backhaul STA needs to add
a Multi-AP IE to the WFA vendor extension element in the WSC M1 message
that indicates it supports the Multi-AP backhaul STA role. The Registrar
(if it support Multi-AP onboarding) will respond to that with a WSC M8
message that also contains the Multi-AP IE, and that contains the
credentials for the backhaul SSID (which may be different from the SSID
on which WPS is performed).
Introduce a new parameter to wpas_wps_start_pbc() and allow it to be
set via control interface's new multi_ap=1 parameter of WPS_PBC call.
multi_ap_backhaul_sta is set to 1 in the automatically created SSID.
Thus, if the AP does not support Multi-AP, association will fail and
WPS will be terminated.
Only wps_pbc is supported.
This commit adds the multi_ap argument only to the control socket
interface, not to the D-Bus interface.
Since WPS associates with the fronthaul BSS instead of the backhaul BSS,
we should not drop association if the AP announces fronthaul-only BSS.
Still, we should only do that in the specific case of WPS. Therefore,
add a check to multi_ap_process_assoc_resp() to allow association with a
fronthaul-only BSS if and only if key_mgmt contains WPS.
Signed-off-by: Davina Lu <ylu@quantenna.com>
Signed-off-by: Igor Mitsyanko <igor.mitsyanko.os@quantenna.com>
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
Signed-off-by: Daniel Golle <daniel@makrotopia.org>
Cc: Marianna Carrera <marianna.carrera.so@quantenna.com>
The Multi-AP specification adds a new subelement to the WFA extension
element in the WPS exchange. Add an additional parameter to
wps_build_wfa_ext() to add this subelement. The subelement is only added
if the parameter is nonzero. Note that we don't reuse the existing
MULTI_AP_SUB_ELEM_TYPE definition here, but rather define a new
WFA_ELEM_MULTI_AP, to make sure the enum of WFA subelement types for WPS
vendor extension remains complete.
For now, all callers set the multi_ap_subelem parameter to 0.
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
The Multi-AP specification only specifies that information elements have
to be added to the Association Request and Association Response frame;
it doesn't specify anything about what should be done in case they are
missing. Previously, we rejected non-backhaul associations on a
backhaul-only BSS, and non-fronthaul associations on a fronthaul-only
BSS.
However, this makes WPS fail when fronthaul and backhaul are separate
SSIDs. Indeed, WPS for the backhaul link is performed on the *fronthaul*
SSID. Thus, the Association Request frmae used for WPS *will* contain
the Multi-AP IE indicating a backhaul STA. Rejecting that association
makes WPS fail.
Therefore, accept a multi-AP backhaul STA Association Request frame on a
fronthaul-only BSS. Still issue a warning about it, but only at level
DEBUG intead of INFO. Also change the condition checking to make it
clearer.
While we're at it, also fix the handling of unexpected bits in the
Multi-AP IE. 4 bits are reserved in the specification, so these
certainly have to be ignored. The specification also doesn't say that
setting one of the other bits is not allowed. Therefore, only report
unexpected values in the Multi-AP IE, don't reject because of it. Note
that a malformed IE (containing more than one byte) still triggers a
rejection.
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
str_token() can return NULL for the name if the remaining token contains
only the delimiter. Fix this to avoid NULL pointer dereference with a
corner case of an invalid value used in the configuration.
Fixes: ec5c39a557 ("AP: Allow identifying which passphrase station used with wpa_psk_file")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new sae_password parameter [|vlanid=<VLAN ID>] can now be used to
assign stations to a specific VLAN based on which SAE Password
Identifier they use. This is similar to the WPA2-Enterprise case where
the RADIUS server can assign stations to different VLANs and the
WPA2-Personal case where vlanid parameter in wpa_psk_file is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This speeds up P2P responses to frames received on an operating channel
in case there is an ongoing P2P listen operation on another channel.
This is applicable to drivers that support multiple channels in
concurrently.
This addresses an issue showing up in the
p2ps_channel_active_go_and_station_different_mcc test case where the
Provision Discovery Request frame can be received on the operating
channel of a group instead of the Listen channel. The response was
delayed until the listen operation timed out and this took too long time
for the peer to receive the response.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow user space applications to check whether wlan firmware is alive
through an nl80211 vendor command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process NL80211_ATTR_REQ_IE from the NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE event to
allow request IEs to be made available for the SME-in-wpa_supplicant
case similarly to how this is done with SME-in-driver with
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend wpa_psk_file to allow an optional VLAN ID to be specified with
"vlanid=<VLAN ID>" prefix on the line. If VLAN ID is specified and the
particular wpa_psk_file entry is used for a station, that station is
bound to the specified VLAN. This can be used to operate a single
WPA2-Personal BSS with multiple VLANs based on the used passphrase/PSK.
This is similar to the WPA2-Enterprise case where the RADIUS server can
assign stations to different VLANs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the ap_handle_timer() timeout is reached for a not-associated STA, do
not default to disassociating that STA first since Disassociation frame
is not really appropriate to send to a STA that is not in associated
state. Instead, skip directly to deauthentication and STA entry removal.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The flags variable needs to be initialized to 0 if check_crl is 0 in
the updated configuration.
Fixes: 159a7fbdea ("crl_reload_interval: Add CRL reloading support")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The change is bigger because here we need to catch the error
condition if the last element doesn't fit.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Rather than always iterating elements from frames with pure
u8 pointers, add a type "struct element" that encapsulates
the id/datalen/data format of them.
Then, add the element iteration macros
* for_each_element
* for_each_element_id
* for_each_element_extid
which take, as their first 'argument', such a structure and
iterate through a given u8 array interpreting it as elements.
While at it also add
* for_each_subelement
* for_each_subelement_id
* for_each_subelement_extid
which instead of taking data/length just take an outer element
and use its data/datalen.
Also add for_each_element_completed() to determine if any of
the loops above completed, i.e., it was able to parse all of
the elements successfully and no data remained.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add test-eapol program that can be used for fuzzing the EAPOL-Key
Supplicant and Authenticator implementations. This tool can write
Supplicant or Authenticator messages into a file as an initialization
step and for the fuzzing step, that file (with potential modifications)
can be used to replace the internally generated message contents.
The TEST_FUZZ=y build parameter is used to make a special build where a
hardcoded random number generator and hardcoded timestamp are used to
force deterministic behavior for the EAPOL-Key operations. This will
also make the implementation ignore Key MIC and AES keywrap errors to
allow processing of modified messages to continue further.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to schedule the postponed RSN preauthentication start
if there are no candidates. Avoid wasting eloop resources for this.
This is most useful for fuzz testing of the 4-way handshake
implementation to avoid getting stuck waiting for this unnecessary one
second time when using eloop to coordinate the Authenticator and
Supplicant state machines.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If none of the supported name attributes are present, the name string
was nul terminated only at the end. Add an explicit nul termination at
the end of the last written (or beginning of the buffer, if nothing is
written) to avoid writing uninitialized data to debug log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Explicitly check the remaining buffer length before trying to read the
ASN.1 header values. Attempt to parse an ASN.1 header when there was not
enough buffer room for it would have started by reading one or two
octets beyond the end of the buffer before reporting invalid data at the
following explicit check for buffer room.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
tlsv1_record_receive() did not return error here and as such, &alert was
not set and must not be used. Report internal error instead to avoid use
of uninitialized memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add test-tls program that can be used for fuzzing the internal TLS
client and server implementations. This tool can write client or server
messages into a file as an initialization step and for the fuzzing step,
that file (with potential modifications) can be used to replace the
internally generated message contents.
The TEST_FUZZ=y build parameter is used to make a special build where a
hardcoded random number generator and hardcoded timestamp are used to
force deterministic behavior for the TLS operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
conn->cred might be NULL here, so check for that explicitly before
checking whether conn->cred->cert_probe is set. This fixes a potential
NULL pointer dereference when going through peer certificates with
event_cb functionality enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Print the SSID with printf escaping instead of wpa_hexdump_ascii()
format to clean up the debug log a bit. This was already done for number
of SSID debug prints.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p->find_start timer was updated on each p2p_find call irrespective of
p2p_find being successful/failed/rejected. For cases where p2p_find was
in progress/pending, another call to p2p_find would be rejected but
p2p->find_start timer would still be updated.
p2p->find_start is maintained in wpa_supplicant to reject the kernel
scan entries before the p2p->find_start time. In above scenario, some of
the scan entries could be discarded even if the Probe Respons frame(s)
were received during the last scan/p2p_find.
This commit changes this to update the p2p->find_start timer only when
call to p2p_find is successful, i.e., a new scan is actually started.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not use a separate enum for MBO WNM-Notification Request frame
subtype values since these share the same number space with the Hotspot
2.0 ones.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previously used value 2 was already assigned for another purpose
(MBO non-preferred channel report), so the newer T&C Acceptable
definition needs to be updated with a unique value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This command has now been extended to include PMK for offload needs, so
the message buffer needs to be cleared explicitly after use to avoid
leaving such material in heap memory unnecessarily.
Fixes: 061a3d3d53 ("nl80211: Add support for FILS Cache Identifier in add/remove_pmkid()")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This command can include keys (WEP or PSK for offload), so the message
buffer needs to be cleared explicitly after use to avoid leaving such
material in heap memory unnecessarily.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
We do not need such payload in the acknowledgment, so adding it uses
resources unnecessarily. Furthermore, the original request can include
key material (e.g., NL80211_ATTR_PMK). libnl does not explicitly clear
this received message buffer and it would be inconvenient for
wpa_supplicant/hostapd to try to clear it with the current libnl design
where a duplicated buffer is actually passed to the callback. This means
that keys might be left unnecessarily in heap memory. Avoid this by
requesting the kernel not to copy back the request payload.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These buffers in TLS-based EAP methods might contain keys or password
(e.g., when using TTLS-PAP or PEAP-GTC), so clear them explicitly to
avoid leaving such material into heap memory unnecessarily.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The case of PEAPv0 with crypto binding did not clear some of the
temporary keys from stack/heap when those keys were not needed anymore.
Clear those explicitly to avoid unnecessary caching of keying material.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Derive EMSK when using EAP-PEAP to enable ERP. In addition, change the
MSK derivation for EAP-PEAP to always derive 128 octets of key material
instead of the 64 octets to cover just the MSK. This is needed with the
PRF used in TLS 1.3 since the output length is mixed into the PRF
context.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The avoid channels are notified through
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_AVOID_FREQUENCY allow minimal traffic, so
enhance the P2P behavior accordingly by considering these avoid
frequencies for P2P discovery/negotiation as long as they are not in
disallowed frequencies list.
Additionally, do not return failure when none of social channels are
available as operation channel, rather, mark the op_channel/op_reg_class
to 0 as this would anyway get selected during the group formation in
p2p_prepare_channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
ieee802_11_rx_wnmsleep_req() might have been called for a short frame
that has no more payload after the Public Action field, i.e., with len
== 0. The bounds checking for the payload length was done only for the
information elements while the one octet Dialog Token field was read
unconditionally. In the original implementation, this could have
resulted in reading one octet beyond the end of the received frame data.
This case has not been reachable after the commit e0785ebbbd ("Use
more consistent Action frame RX handling in both AP mode paths"), but it
is better to address the specific issue in ieee802_11_rx_wnmsleep_req()
as well for additional protection against accidential removal of the
check and also to have something that can be merged into an older
version (pre-v2.7) if desired. The comments below apply for such older
versions where the case could have been reachable.
Depending on driver interface specific mechanism used for fetching the
frame, this could result in reading one octet beyond the end of a
stack/hash buffer or reading an uninitialized octet from within a
buffer. The actual value that was read as the Dialog Token field is not
used since the function returns immediately after having read this value
when there is no information elements following the field.
This issue was initially added in commit d32d94dbf4 ("WNM: Add
WNM-Sleep Mode implementation for AP") (with CONFIG_IEEE80211V=y build
option) and it remained in place during number of cleanup and fix
changes in this area and renaming of the build parameter to
CONFIG_WNM=y. The impacted function was not included in any default
build without one of the these optional build options being explicitly
enabled. CONFIG_WNM=y is still documented as "experimental and not
complete implementation" in hostapd/defconfig. In addition, commit
114f2830d2 ("WNM: Ignore WNM-Sleep Mode Request in wnm_sleep_mode=0
case") made this function exit before the impact read if WNM-Sleep Mode
support was not explicitly enabled in runtime configuration
(wnm_sleep_mode=1 in hostapd.conf). Commit e0785ebbbd ("Use more
consistent Action frame RX handling in both AP mode paths") made this
code unreachable in practice.
Add an explicit check that the frame has enough payload before reading
the Dialog Token field in ieee802_11_rx_wnmsleep_req().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This patch adds a new flag 'crl_reload_interval' to reload CRL
periodically. This can be used to reload ca_cert file and the included
CRL information on every new TLS session if difference between the last
reload and the current time in seconds is greater than
crl_reload_interval.
This reloading is used for cases where check_crl is 1 or 2 and the CRL
is included in the ca_file.
Signed-off-by: Paresh Chaudhary <paresh.chaudhary@rockwellcollins.com>
Signed-off-by: Jared Bents <jared.bents@rockwellcollins.com>
It is now possible to optionally specify keyid for
each wpa_psk_file entry:
keyid=something 00:00:00:00:00:00 secretpassphrase
When station connects and the passphrase it used
has an associated keyid it will be appended to the
AP-STA-CONNECTED event string:
wlan0: AP-STA-CONNECTED 00:36:76:21:dc:7b keyid=something
It's also possible to retrieve it through the control interface:
$ hostapd_cli all_sta
Selected interface 'ap0'
00:36:76:21:dc:7b
...
keyid=something
New hostapd is able to read old wpa_psk_file. However, old hostapd will
not be able to read the new wpa_psk_file if it includes keyids.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal@plume.com>
This doesn't change any behavior on its own. It's going to be used to
expose per-station keyids and allow reloading passphrases in runtime.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal@plume.com>
Support the new Extended Capabilities field bits 81 and 82 to indicate
whether SAe Password Identifiers are in use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This new QCA vendor attribute indicates the EVM value in netlink.
Signed-off-by: stonez <stonez@codeaurora.org>
:100644 100644 ad5dac2... ede4fc8... M src/common/qca-vendor.h
When using LibreSSL build fails with:
../src/crypto/tls_openssl.o: in function `tls_connection_client_cert':
../src/crypto/tls_openssl.c:2817: undefined reference to `SSL_use_certificate_chain_file'
collect2: error: ld returned 1 exit status
make: *** [Makefile:1901: wpa_supplicant] Error 1
There is no such function in LibreSSL.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Strogin <stefan.strogin@gmail.com>
An optional parameter "he" is added to p2p_connect, p2p_group_add, and
p2p_invite to enable 11ax HE support. The new p2p_go_he=1 configuration
parameter can be used to request this to be enabled by default.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The vendor command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_AVOID_FREQUENCY was defined
to carry the list of avoid frequencies that aim to avoid any
interference with other coexistencies. This recommendation was followed
strictly by trying to prevent WLAN traffic on the impacted channels.
This commit refines the expectation of the interface by defining this
avoid channel list to allow minimal traffic but not heavier one. For
example, P2P may still be able to use avoid list frequencies for P2P
discovery and GO negotiation if the actual group can be set up on a not
impact channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add support for configuring parameters for the MU EDCA Parameter Set
element per IEEE P802.11ax/D3.0.
Signed-off-by: Siva Mullati <siva.mullati@intel.com>
If the libnl version is not specified explicitly with CONFIG_LIBNL*, try
to check for the most likely case today with pkg-config.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Fix compilation issue if we want to build wpa_supplicant without any
wireless connectivity but only with MACSec support via Linux kernel
driver.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <a.s.kartashev@gmail.com>
Two recent changes to MKA create a situation where a new MI is generated
every time a SAK Use parameter set is decoded. The first change moved
invalid key detection from ieee802_1x_decode_basic_body() to
ieee802_1x_kay_decode_mpkdu():
commit db9ca18bbf ("mka: Do not ignore MKPDU parameter set decoding failures")
The second change forces the KaY to generate a new MI when an invalid
key is detected:
commit a8aeaf41df ("mka: Change MI if key invalid")
The fix is to move generation of a new MI from the old invalid key
detection location to the new location.
Fixes: a8aeaf41df ("mka: Change MI if key invalid")
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Upon issuing a connect request we need to indicate that we want the
driver to offload the 802.1X 4-way handshake for us. Indicate it if
the driver capability supports the offload.
Signed-off-by: Arend van Spriel <arend.vanspriel@broadcom.com>
Allow drivers to indicate support for offloading 4-way handshake for
either IEEE 802.1X (WPA2-Enterprise; EAP) and/or WPA/WPA2-PSK
(WPA2-Personal) by splitting the WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_4WAY_HANDSHAKE flag
into two separate flags.
Signed-off-by: Arend van Spriel <arend.vanspriel@broadcom.com>
When an interface is re-enabled after it was disabled during CAC, it
won't ever get active since hostapd is waiting for a CAC_FINISHED while
kernel side is waiting for a CMD_RADAR_DETECT to start a CAC.
This commit checks for a pending CAC when an interface is enabled and if
so restarts its DFS processing.
Signed-off-by: Zefir Kurtisi <zefir.kurtisi@neratec.com>
In the previous RADIUS client implementation, when there are multiple
RADIUS servers, we kept trying the next server when the current message
can not be acked. It leads to endless retry when all the RADIUS servers
are down.
Fix this by keeping a counter for the accumulated retransmit attempts
for the message, and guarantee that after all the servers failover
RADIUS_CLIENT_MAX_FAILOVER times the message will be dropped.
Another issue with the previous code was that the decision regarding
whether the server should fail over was made immediately after we send
out the message. This patch guarantees we consider whether a server
needs failover after pending ack times out.
Signed-off-by: Bo Chen<bochen@meraki.com>
Define QCA vendor command attributes to configure HE +HTC support and
HE operating mode control transmission. This is used to configure the
testbed device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These are not allowed in ISO C++ (and well, not really in ISO C either,
but that does not result in compiler warning without pedantic
compilation).
Since ieee802_11_common.h may end up getting pulled into C++ code for
some external interfaces, it is more convenient to keep it free of these
cases. Pull in ieee802_11_defs.h to get enum phy_type defined and move
enum chan_width to common/defs.h (which was already pulled in into
src/drivers/driver.h and src/common/ieee802_11_common.h).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While the AP is configured to enable both FT-PSK and WPA-PSK, an HP
printer request both AKMs (copied from AP?) in Association Request
frame, but don't add MDIE and don't use FT. This results in the
connection failing.
Next in logs we see:
RSN: Trying to use FT, but MDIE not included
IE - hexdump(len=26): 30 18 01 00 00 0f ac 04 01 00 00 0f ac 04
02 00 00 0f ac 02 00 0f ac 04 00 00
This is seen with some HP and Epson printers. Work around this by
stripping FT AKM(s) when MDE is not present and there is still a non-FT
AKM available.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz@plumewifi.com>
The Android-specific chmod and chown operations on the client socket
(for communication with wpa_supplicant) did not protect against file
replacement between the bind() and chmod()/chown() calls. If the
directory in which the client socket is created (depends a bit on the
version and platform, but /data/misc/wifi/sockets is commonly used)
allows write access to processes that are different (less privileged)
compared to the process calling wpa_ctrl_open2(), it might be possible
to delete the socket file and replace it with something else (mainly, a
symlink) before the chmod/chown operations occur. This could have
resulted in the owner or permissions of the target of that symlink being
modified.
In general, it would be safest to use a directory which has more limited
write privileges (/data/misc/wifi/sockets normally has 'wifi' group
(AID_WIFI) with write access), but if that cannot be easily changed due
to other constraints, it is better to make wpa_ctrl_open2() less likely
to enable this type of race condition between the operations.
Replace chown() with lchown() (i.e., a version that does not dereference
symlinks) and chmod() with fchmod() on the socket before the bind() call
which is also not going to dereference a symlink (whereas chmod()
would). lchown() is a standard operation, but the fchmod() on the socket
is less so (unspecified behavior in some systems). However, it seems to
work on Linux and in particular, on Android, where this code is
executed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While selecting a new channel as a reaction to radar event we need to
take into account supported bandwidth for each channel provided via
nl80211. Without this modification hostapd might select an unsupported
channel that would fail during AP startup.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <dlebed@quantenna.com>
While doing automatic channel selection we need to take into account
supported bandwidth for each channel provided via nl80211. Without this
modification hostapd might select an unsupported channel which would
fail during AP startup.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <dlebed@quantenna.com>
This adds checks to common code to verify supported bandwidth options
for each channel using nl80211-provided info. No support of additional
modes is added, just additional checks. Such checks are needed because
driver/hardware can declare more strict limitations than declared in the
IEEE 802.11 standard. Without this patch hostapd might select
unsupported channel and that will fail because Linux kernel does check
channel bandwidth limitations.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <dlebed@quantenna.com>
Add NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_NO_* channel attributes parsing. This is
needed for correct checking if channel is available in a particular
bandwidth.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <dlebed@quantenna.com>
Add support for 160 MHz BW channels to automatic channel selection
algorithm. Only 36 and 100 channels are supported as 160 MHz channels.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <lebed.dmitry@gmail.com>
Move to the version used in draft-ietf-emu-eap-tls13-03.txt, i.e.,
include the 0x0D prefix and use a different TLS-Exporter() label string.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some distributions (e.g., Debian) have started introducting systemwide
OpenSSL policies to disable older protocol versions and ciphers
throughout all programs using OpenSSL. This can result in significant
number of interoperability issues with deployed EAP implementations.
Allow explicit wpa_supplicant (EAP peer) and hostapd (EAP server)
parameters to be used to request systemwide policies to be overridden if
older versions are needed to be able to interoperate with devices that
cannot be updated to support the newer protocol versions or keys. The
default behavior is not changed here, i.e., the systemwide policies will
be followed if no explicit override configuration is used. The overrides
should be used only if really needed since they can result in reduced
security.
In wpa_supplicant, tls_disable_tlsv1_?=0 value in the phase1 network
profile parameter can be used to explicitly enable TLS versions that are
disabled in the systemwide configuration. For example,
phase1="tls_disable_tlsv1_0=0 tls_disable_tlsv1_1=0" would request TLS
v1.0 and TLS v1.1 to be enabled even if the systemwide policy enforces
TLS v1.2 as the minimum version. Similarly, openssl_ciphers parameter
can be used to override systemwide policy, e.g., with
openssl_ciphers="DEFAULT@SECLEVEL=1" to drop from security level 2 to 1
in Debian to allow shorter keys to be used.
In hostapd, tls_flags parameter can be used to configure similar
options. E.g., tls_flags=[ENABLE-TLSv1.0][ENABLE-TLSv1.1]
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
TLS v1.3 was already disabled by default for EAP-FAST, EAP-TTLS,
EAP-PEAP, and EAP-TLS, but the unauthenticated client cases of EAP-TLS
-like functionality (e.g., the one used in OSEN) were missed. Address
those EAP types as well in the same way of disabling TLS v1.3 by default
for now to avoid functionality issues with TLS libraries that enable TLS
v1.3 by default.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
SSL_use_certificate_chain_file() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0, so need to
maintain the old version using SSL_use_certificate_file() for backwards
compatibility.
Fixes: 658c39809b ("OpenSSL: Load chain certificates from client_cert file")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
FT-over-the-DS has a special case where the STA entry (and as such, the
TK) has not yet been configured to the driver depending on which driver
interface is used. For that case, allow add-STA operation to be used
(instead of set-STA). This is needed to allow mac80211-based drivers to
accept the STA parameter configuration. Since this is after a new
FT-over-DS exchange, a new TK has been derived after the last STA entry
was added to the driver, so key reinstallation is not a concern for this
case.
Fixes: 0e3bd7ac68 ("hostapd: Avoid key reinstallation in FT handshake")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The documentation in the hostapd.conf file says that the dynamic_vlan
variable is used to control whether VLAN assignments are accepted from a
RADIUS server. The implication seems to be that a static VLAN assignment
will come from the accept_mac_file if dynamic_vlan is set to 0, and a
dynamic assignment will come from the RADIUS server if dynamic_vlan is
set to 1. Instead, I'm seeing that the static settings from the
accept_mac_file are ignored if dynamic_vlan is set to 0, but used if
dynamic_vlan is set to 1. If dynamic_vlan is set to 1 and the RADIUS
server does not provide a VLAN, then the accept_mac_file assignment is
overridden and the STA is assigned to the default non-VLANed interface.
If my understanding of the expected behavior is correct, then I believe
the problem is in ap_sta_set_vlan(). That routine checks the
dynamic_vlan setting, but has no way of determining whether the incoming
vlan_desc is static (i.e., from accept_mac_file) or dynamic (i.e., from
a RADIUS server).
I've attached a patch that gets hostapd working as I believe it's meant
to, and updates the documentation to make the implicit behavior
explicit.
The functional changes are:
- hostapd_allowed_address() will always extract the vlan_id from the
accept_macs file. It will not update the vlan_id from the RADIUS cache
if dynamic_vlan is DISABLED.
- hostapd_acl_recv_radius() will not update the cached vlan_id if
dynamic_vlan is DISABLED.
- ieee802_1x_receive_auth() will not update the vlan_id if dynamic_vlan
is DISABLED.
More cosmetic:
Most of the delta is just moving code out of ieee802_1x_receive_auth()
into a new ieee802_1x_update_vlan() routine. While I initially did this
because the new DISABLED check introduced excessive indentation, it has
the added advantage of eliminating the vlan_description allocation and
os_memset() call for all DYNAMIC_VLAN_DISABLED configs.
I've done a couple rounds of review offline with Michael Braun (who has
done much of the work in this part of the code) and incorporated his
feedback.
If dynamic_vlan=0 (disabled), vlan assignments will be managed using the
local accept_mac_file ACL file, even if a RADIUS server is being used
for user authentication. This allows us to manage users and devices
independently.
Signed-off-by: Nils Nieuwejaar <nils.nieuwejaar@gmail.com>
The new ieee802_11_ext_capab() and wpa_bss_ext_capab() functions can be
used to check whether a specific extended capability bit is set instead
of having to implement bit parsing separately for each need.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PADDING array used when adding padding bits in MD4 never change
so can be made const. Making it const puts the array in .rodata
section and can save a few bytes of RAM for systems running without
virtual memory.
Signed-off-by: Mikael Kanstrup <mikael.kanstrup@sony.com>
After performing a successful channel switch, the AP should update its
own neighbor report element, so do this from src/ap/drv_callbacks.c
after a successful switch.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
Move functions corresponding to neighbor report elements to
src/ap/neighbor_db.[c,h] in preparation to using them after channel
switch from src/ap/drv_callbacks.c.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
The function sha512_compress() has a local variable that consumes 640
bytes. This is very heavy for embedded devices that have limited stack
resources. Handle this by replacing the static allocation with a dynamic
one.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
IEEE P802.11-REVmd/D2.0, 9.4.2.20.7 (Beacon request) and 9.4.2.21.7
(Beacon report) add the Last Beacon Report Indication subelement to
Beacon Request and Beacon Report elements.
Add the Last Beacon Report Indication subelement to all Beacon Report
elements if the Beacon Request indicated that this subelement is
requested.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
When the frame body subelement would cause the measurement report
element to exceed the maximum element size, the frame body subelement
used to be truncated. In addition, some elements were always truncated
in order to keep the reported frame body short (e.g. RSN IE).
Alternatively, IEEE P802.11-REVmd/D2.0, 9.4.2.21.7 extension to Beacon
reporting can be used: The frame body subelement is fragmented across
multiple beacon report elements, and the reported frame body fragment ID
subelement is added.
Use beacon report fragmentation instead of truncating the frame body
as this method gives the AP a more complete information about the
reported APs.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
EV_SET() for EV_ADD used a specific filter type, but that same filter
type was not provided to the matching EV_DELETE case. This resulted in
the kernel rejecting the deletion with "Invalid argument". Fix this by
setting the same filter type for both operations.
Fixes: f9982b3212 ("Implement kqueue(2) support via CONFIG_ELOOP_KQUEUE")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous implementation did not work if the first registered socket
had fd > 16 or if the fd was more than double the largest value used in
previous registrations. Those cases could result in too small a memory
allocation being used and writes/reads beyond the end of that buffer.
This fix is applicable to CONFIG_ELOOP_EPOLL=y and CONFIG_ELOOP_KQUEUE=y
builds.
Fixes: f0356ec85c ("eloop: Add epoll option for better performance")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
According to random(4) manual, /dev/random is essentially deprecated on
Linux for quite some time:
"The /dev/random interface is considered a legacy interface, and
/dev/urandom is preferred and sufficient in all use cases, with the
exception of applications which require randomness during early boot
time; for these applications, getrandom(2) must be used instead, because
it will block until the entropy pool is initialized."
An attempt to use it would cause unnecessary blocking on machines
without a good hwrng even when it shouldn't be needed. Since Linux 3.17,
a getrandom(2) call is available that will block only until the
randomness pool has been seeded.
It is probably not a good default yet as it requires a fairly recent
kernel and glibc (3.17 and 2.25 respectively).
Signed-off-by: Lubomir Rintel <lkundrak@v3.sk>
In 2013 or so, IFNAME=foo was prepended to at least the Unix socket
communication from wpa_supplicant to wpa_cli. This broke the (fragile)
logic that made ping/pong work more often when wpa_supplicant is busy
sending logging info to wpa_cli.
Adding check for IFNAME=foo makes this work better.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
This helps the server to build the chain to trusted CA when PEM encoding
of client_cert is used with multiple listed certificates. This was
already done for the server certificate configuration, but the client
certificate was limited to using only the first certificate in the file.
Signed-off-by: Isaac Boukris <iboukris@gmail.com>
Legacy ioctl() through SIOCDEVPRIVATE are deprecated. Follow the
approach taken by bridge-utils and make use of new bridge ioctl's
whenever possible.
For example, using legacy ioctl() breaks dynamic VLAN mode on 32-bit
Linux systems running 64-bit kernels.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
If the internal EAP server is used instead of an external RADIUS server,
sm->identity does not get set. Use the identity from the internal EAP
server in such case to get the dot1xAuthSessionUserName value in STA MIB
information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The SSL_METHOD patching hack to get proper OCSP validation for Hotspot
2.0 OSU needs cannot be used with OpenSSL 1.1.0 and newer since the
SSL_METHOD structure is not exposed anymore. Fall back to using the
incomplete CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYSTATUS design to fix the build.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
SKM_sk_num() is not available anymore, so use DEFINE_STACK_OF() to get
the appropriate accessor functions.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The direct ssl->ctx access are not allowed anymore in newer OpenSSL
versions, so use the SSL_get_SSL_CTX() helper for this.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Try to make RSSI-based rejection of associating stations a bit less
likely to trigger false rejections by considering RSSI from the last
received Authentication frame. Association is rejected only if both the
Authentication and (Re)Association Request frames are below the RSSI
threshold.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
An AP might reject a STA association request due to low RSSI. In such
case, the AP informs the STA the desired RSSI improvement and a retry
timeout. The STA might retry to associate even if the RSSI hasn't
improved if the retry timeout expired.
Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com>
An AP might refuse to connect a STA if it has a low RSSI. In such case,
the AP informs the STA with the desired RSSI delta and a retry timeout.
Any subsequent association attempt with that AP (BSS) should be avoided,
unless the RSSI level improved by the desired delta or the timeout has
expired.
Defined in Wi-Fi Alliance Optimized Connectivity Experience technical
specification v1.0, section 3.14 (RSSI-based association rejection
information).
Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com>
Add the ability to ignore time-based CRL errors from OpenSSL by
specifying a new configuration parameter, check_crl_strict=0.
This causes the following:
- This setting does nothing when CRL checking is not enabled.
- When CRL is enabled, "strict mode" will cause CRL time errors to not
be ignored and will continue behaving as it currently does.
- When CRL is enabled, disabling strict mode will cause CRL time
errors to be ignored and will allow connections.
By default, check_crl_strict is set to 1, or strict mode, to keep
current functionality.
Signed-off-by: Sam Voss <sam.voss@rockwellcollins.com>
Build configurations with CONFIG_TLS=internal and NEED_SHA512 failed due
to missing sha512.c file. Add that file even though this is not really
used in the currently available configuration combinations since DPP and
OWE are the only users of it and the internal crypto implementation
supports neither.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
One of the reset_participant_mi() callers did not log the error. Make
this more consistent with the other callers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
One of the linux_br_del_if() calls did not log nl80211-specific entry.
Make this more consistent with the other cases even though
linux_br_add_if() function itself is logging an error in the ioctl()
failure case (but not in the interface not found case).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it possible to use ECDSA certificates with EAP-TLS/TTLS/etc.
It should be noted that when using Suite B, different mechanism is used
to specify the allowed ECDH curves and this new parameter must not be
used in such cases.
Signed-off-by: Hristo Venev <hristo@venev.name>
Some versions of OpenSSL need server support for ECDH to be explicitly
enabled, so provide a new parameter for doing so and all
SSL_{,CTX_}set_ecdh_auto() for versions that need it to enable automatic
selection.
Signed-off-by: Hristo Venev <hristo@venev.name>
handle_dhcp() was first trying to learn the IP address of an associated
STA before doing broadcast-to-unicast conversion. This could result in
not converting some DHCPACK messages since the address learning part
aborts processing by returning from the function in various cases.
Reorder these operations to allow broadcast-to-unicast conversion to
happen even if an associated STA entry is not updated based on a
DHCPACK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 11.11 describes that the ICV is separate from the
parameter sets before it. Due to its convenient layout the ICV Indicator
'body part' is used to encode the ICV as well.
IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 11.11.3 describes the encoding of MKPDUs. In
bullet e) is desribed that the ICV Indicator itself is encoded when the
ICV is not 16 octets in length. IEEE Std 802.1Xbx-2014, Table 11-7 note
e) states that it will not be encoded unless the Algorithm Agility
parameter specifies the use of an ICV that is not 16 octets in length.
Therefore the length calculation for the ICV indicator body part must
take into account if the ICV Indicator is to be encoded or not. The
actual encoder of the ICV body already takes care of the rest.
In practice, this change will remove the ICV Indicator parameter set (4
octets before the ICV value itself) since the only defined algorithm
agility value uses an ICV of 16 octets. IEEE Std 802.1X-2010 MKPDU
validation and decoding rules in 11.11.2 and 11.11.4 require the
receipient to handle both cases of ICV Indicator being included or not.
Signed-off-by: Jaap Keuter <jaap.keuter@xs4all.nl>
It was possible for a participant to first be elected as a key server
and schedule a new SAK to be generated and distributed just to be
followed by another participant being elected as the key server. That
did not stop the participant that disabled key server functionality to
stop generating the new SAK and then trying to distribute it. That is
not correct behavior, so make these steps conditional on the participant
still being a key server when going through the timer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This pointer needs to be cleared when the matching SAK is being removed
from the SAK list. The previous implementation was doing something
pretty strange in the loop by clearing the pointer for any non-matching
key that happened to be iterated through before finding the matching
key. This could probably result in incorrect behavior, but not clearing
the pointer for the matching key could do more harm by causing freed
memory to be referenced.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using a specifically set index value from table definition,
use the actual real index of the table entry. This removes need for
maintaining these index values separately. Furthermore, the
mka_alg_tbl[] index was already off-by-one (but not used anywhere).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When running wpa_supplicant (with logging for testing) the log output is
somewhat disorganized for KaY related items. E.g., items are not
aligned, inconsistent type handling, wrong wording, missing labels, etc.
This change tries to clean up the log output, so it is somewhat more
accessible.
Signed-off-by: Jaap Keuter <jaap.keuter@xs4all.nl>
Go through the SM_STEP_RUN() global transition to get into the INIT
state to follow the state machine design more closely.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While IEEE Std 802.1X-2010 talks about arbitrary authorization data that
could be passed to the CP from sources like RADIUS server, there is not
much point in trying to implement this as an arbitrary memory buffer in
wpa_supplicant. Should such data be supported in the future, it would
much more likely use more detailed data structures that encode the
received data in easier to use form.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to allow 256-bit key hierarchy to be derived from
EAP-based authentication. For now, the MSK length is hardcoded to 128
bits, so the previous behavior is maintained.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The CAK length is not hardcoded in the algorithm agility parameter, so
remove that from the table. Instead, allow both 16 (128-bit) and 32
(256-bit) CAK to be used so that the following key derivations use
appropriate key lengths based on the configured/derived CAK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The ICK and KEK are derived from a CAK and the length of the CAK
determines the length of the KCK/ICK. Remove the separate ICK/KEK length
parameters from the algorithm agility table.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Extend the previously implemented KDF (IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 6.2.1) to
support 256-bit input key and AES-CMAC-256. This does not change any
actual key derivation functionality yet, but is needed as a step towards
supporting 256-bit CAK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible to get a situation where a peer removes the Key Server
from its live peers list but the server still thinks that the peer is
alive (e.g., high packet loss in one direction). In such a case, the Key
Server will continue to advertise Last Key but this peer will not be
able to set up SA as it has already deleted its key.
Change the peer MI which will force the Key Server to distribute a new
SAK.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
Decrease timeout for a peer with duplicated SCI to speed up process in
case it is a valid peer after MI change.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
There is already partial support of GCM-AES-256. It is possible to
enable this mode by setting 'kay->macsec_csindex = 1;' in
ieee802_1x_kay_init() function, but the generated key contained only 128
bits of data while other 128 bits are in 0.
Enables KaY to generate full 256-bit SAK from the same 128-bit CAK. Note
that this does not support 256-bit CAK or AES-CMAC-256 -based KDF.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
According IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 9.8 each participant shall record the
values of NextPN for last SAK accepted from each Key Server to use it in
case of a switch from one Key Server to another and back. Add LPN
recording and set saved value as the initial PN for the created channel.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
It is possible that the driver fails to create Secure Channel (due to
hardware limitations for example). Add checks of create_*_sc() result
codes and abort procedure in case of failure.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
Fix a minor memory leak in ieee802_1x_kay_create_mka() in
case of KEK/ICK derivation failure.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
Add new configuration parameters macsec_replay_protect and
macsec_replay_window to allow user to set up MACsec replay protection
feature. Note that according to IEEE Std 802.1X-2010 replay protection
and delay protection are different features: replay protection is
related only to SecY and does not appear on MKA level while delay
protection is something that KaY can use to manage SecY state.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
When syslog logging is used output from wpa_hexdump_ascii() was silently
discarded. This patch enables wpa_hexdump_ascii() to print data to
syslog but without ASCII decoding.
Signed-off-by: Andrey Kartashev <andrey.kartashev@afconsult.com>
To prevent a remote peer from getting stuck in a perpetual 'potential
peer' state, only update the peer liveness timer 'peer->expire' for live
peers and not for potential peers.
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 9.4.3 (Determining liveness), potential peers
need to show liveness by including our MI/MN in their transmitted MKPDU
(within potential or live parameter sets).
When a potential peer does include our MI/MN in an MKPDU, we respond by
moving the peer from 'potential_peers' to 'live_peers'.
If a potential peer does not include our MI/MN in an MKPDU within
MKPDU_LIFE_TIME, let the peer expire to facilitate getting back in sync
with the remote peer.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
The previous commit introduced parameter set error checking. This commit
extends upon that by considering missing parameter sets a failure.
Two checks are added by this commit. First, verify that live peers start
encoding MKA_SAK_USE within a reasonable amount of time after going live
(10 MKPDUs). Second, verify that once a live peer starts encoding
MKA_SAK_USE it continues to do so indefinitely.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
The status values returned by mka_param_body_handler.body_rx functions
are currently ignored by ieee802_1x_kay_decode_mkpdu(). If a failure is
detected the KaY should (a) stop processing the MKDPU and (b) do not
update the associated peer's liveliness.
IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Table 11-7 (MKPDU parameter sets) and 11.11.3
(Encoding MKPDUs) dictate that MKA_SAK_USE (set type 3) will always be
encoded before MKA_DISTRIBUTED_SAK (set type 4) in MKPDUs. Due to
implementation of mka_param_body_handler, the code will always decode
MKA_SAK_USE before MKA_DISTRIBUTED_SAK. When MKA_DISTRUBUTED_SAK
contains a new SAK the code should decode MKA_DISTRUBUTED_SAK first so
that the latest SAK is in known before decoding MKA_SAK_USE.
The ideal solution would be to make two passes at MKDPU decoding: the
first pass decodes MKA_DISTRIBUTED_SAK, the second pass decodes all
other parameter sets.
A simpler and less risky solution is presented here: ignore MKA_SAK_USE
failures if MKA_DISTRIBUTED_SAK is also present. The new SAK will be
saved so that the next MKPDU's MKA_SAK_USE can be properly decoded. This
is basically what the code prior to this commit was doing (by ignoring
all errors).
Also, the only real recourse the KaY has when detecting any bad
parameter set is to ignore the MKPDU by not updating the corresponding
peer's liveliness timer, 'peer->expire'.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
If a live peer ever changes its Member Identifier (MI), the KaY
correctly detects a "duplicated SCI" but then proceeds to delete the
peer without deleting the peer's resources (i.e., RxSC, RxSAs, TxSAs).
Note that a remote peer's MI will change if and when an
ieee8021XPaePortInitialize is executed on the remote port.
The solution here is to ignore all MKPDUs containing the new MI until
after the peer (that corresponds to the old MI) expires and cleans up
its resources. After the old peer is removed reception of the next MKPDU
containing the new MI will result in the creation of a new peer with the
new MI.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 12-2 (CP state machine), READY to
TRANSMIT transition includes !controlledPortEnabled condition.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 12-2 (CP state machine), READY should
move to ABANDON (not RECEIVE) when new_sak or changed_connect is true.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 12-2 (CP state machine), RECEIVING to
TRANSMIT transition includes !controlledPortEnabled condition.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 12-2 (CP state machine), deleteSAs(oki)
is used upon entering RETIRE. Do that in addition to freeing sm->oki.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
The purpose of the Lowest Acceptable PN (lpn) parameters in the MACsec
SAK Use parameter set is to enforce delay protection. Per IEEE Std
802.1X-2010, Clause 9, "Each SecY uses MKA to communicate the lowest PN
used for transmission with the SAK within the last two seconds, allowing
receivers to bound transmission delays."
When encoding the SAK Use parameter set the KaY should set llpn and olpn
to the lowest PN transmitted by the latest SAK and oldest SAK (if
active) within the last two seconds. Because MKPDUs are transmitted
every 2 seconds (MKA_HELLO_TIME), the solution implemented here
calculates lpn based on the txsc->next_pn read during the previous MKPDU
transmit.
Upon receiving and decoding a SAK Use parameter set with delay
protection enabled, the KaY will update the SecY's lpn if the delay
protect lpn is greater than the SecY's current lpn (which is a product
of last PN received and replay protection and window size).
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Delay Protect and Replay Protect are two separate and distinct features
of MKA. Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 9.10.1 "Delay Protect, TRUE if LPNs
are being reported sufficiently frequently to allow the recipient to
provide data delay protection. If FALSE, the LPN can be reported as
zero", and per 9.10 "NOTE--Enforcement of bounded received delay
necessitates transmission of MKPDUs at frequent (0.5 s) intervals, to
meet a maximum data delay of 2 s while minimizing connectivity
interruption due to the possibility of lost or delayed MKPDUs."
This means struct ieee802_1x_mka_sak_use_body::delay_protect should only
be set TRUE when MKPDUs are being transmitted every 0.5 s (or faster).
By default the KaY sends MKPDUs every MKA_HELLO_TIME (2.0 s), so by
default delay_protect should be FALSE.
Add a new 'u32 mka_hello_time' parameter to struct ieee802_1x_kay. If
delay protection is desired, the KaY initialization code should set
kay->mka_hello_time to MKA_BOUNDED_HELLO_TIME (500 ms).
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Commit 7b4d546e ("wpa_supplicant: Add macsec_integ_only setting for
MKA") introduced policy setting SHOULD_ENCRYPT (MACsec provides
integrity+confidentiality) in addition to SHOULD_SECURE (MACsec provides
integrity only). In both cases the KaY is populating the
"Confidentiality Offset" parameter within the "Distributed SAK parameter
set" with CONFIDENTIALITY_OFFSET_0=1. In the case of SHOULD_SECURE the
parameter should be populated with CONFIDENTIALITY_NONE=0.
IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Table 11-6 and Figure 11-11 define how the two
Confidentiality Offset bits in the "Distributed SAK parameter set" must
be set: "0 if confidentiality not used" and "1 if confidentiality with
no offset". When policy is SHOULD_SECURE KaY should to send the former,
and when policy is SHOULD_ENCRYPT KaY should send the latter.
Fixes: 7b4d546e3d ("wpa_supplicant: Add macsec_integ_only setting for MKA")
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, Figure 11-7 explains that "Parameter set body
length" is exclusive of the suffix padding.
Fix variable length encoding and decoding when CKN length is not a
multiple of 4 bytes.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Mark the data structures used in construction/parsing frames packed to
prevent compiler from being able to pad them.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_supplicant STATUS-DRIVER control interface command can now be used
to fetch the macsec_linux driver status information like parent
interface name.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These do not really get truncated in practice, but it looks like some
newer compilers warn about the prints, so silence those by checking the
result and do something a bit more useful if the output would actually
get truncated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Try to fetch the list of supported AKM suite selectors from the driver
through the vendor interface
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_SUPPORTED_AKMS. If that command is
available and succeeds, use the returned list to populate the
wpa_driver_capa key_mgmt information instead of assuming all
cfg80211-based drivers support all AKMs. If the driver does not support
this command, the previous behavior is maintained.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This new QCA vendor command is used to query the supported AKM suite
selectors from the driver. There has been no such capability indication
from the driver and thus the current user space has to assume the driver
to support all the AKMs. This may be the case with some drivers (e.g.,
mac80211-based ones) but there are cfg80211-based drivers that implement
SME and have constraints on which AKMs can be supported (e.g., such
drivers may need an update to support SAE AKM using
NL80211_CMD_EXTERNAL_AUTH). Allow such drivers to specify the exact set
of supported AKMs so that user space tools can determine what network
profile options should be allowed to be configured. This command returns
the list of supported AKM suite selectors in the attribute
NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Looks like LibreSSL 2.8 pulled in the OpenSSL API change to mark the
first argument to X509_ALGOR_get0() const.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When using LibreSSL instead of OpenSSL, linkage of hostapd executable
fails with the following error when using some LibreSSL versions
../src/crypto/tls_openssl.o: In function `tls_verify_cb':
tls_openssl.c:(.text+0x1273): undefined reference to `ASN1_STRING_get0_data'
../src/crypto/tls_openssl.o: In function `tls_connection_peer_serial_num':
tls_openssl.c:(.text+0x3023): undefined reference to `ASN1_STRING_get0_data'
collect2: error: ld returned 1 exit status
make: *** [Makefile:1278: hostapd] Error 1
ASN1_STRING_get0_data is present in recent OpenSSL, but absent in some
versions of LibreSSL (confirmed for version 2.6.5), so fallback needs to
be defined in this case, just like for old OpenSSL.
This patch was inspired by similar patches to other projects, such as
spice-gtk, pjsip.
Link: https://bugs.gentoo.org/672834
Signed-off-by: Andrey Utkin <andrey_utkin@gentoo.org>
This makes it easier to integrate dynamic VLANs in custom network
configurations. The bridge name is added after the interface name in the
vlan_file line, also separated by whitespace.
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@nbd.name>
Add support for starting FTM responder when in AP mode. This just sends
the appropriate NEW/SET_BEACON command to the driver with the LCI/civic
location data.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Enable FTM responder and configure LCI and civic if ftm_responder
configuration option is set. Since ftm_responder configuration existed
before and was used to set extended capability bits, don't fail AP setup
flow if ftm_responder is set, but the driver doesn't advertise FTM
responder support.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add configuration options to enable FTM responder and configure LCI and
civic parameters. In addition, introduce WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_FTM_RESPONDER
flag, which can be used to indicate FTM responder support in AP mode.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Advertise vendor specific Multi-AP IE in (Re)Association Request frames
and process Multi-AP IE from (Re)Association Response frames if the user
enables Multi-AP fuctionality. If the (Re)Association Response frame
does not contain the Multi-AP IE, disassociate.
This adds a new configuration parameter 'multi_ap_backhaul_sta' to
enable/disable Multi-AP functionality.
Enable 4-address mode after association (if the Association Response
frame contains the Multi-AP IE). Also enable the bridge in that case.
This is necessary because wpa_supplicant only enables the bridge in
wpa_drv_if_add(), which only gets called when an interface is added
through the control interface, not when it is configured from the
command line.
Signed-off-by: Venkateswara Naralasetty <vnaralas@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
The purpose of Multi-AP specification is to enable inter-operability
across Wi-Fi access points (APs) from different vendors.
This patch introduces one new configuration parameter 'multi_ap' to
enable Multi-AP functionality and to configure the BSS as a backhaul
and/or fronthaul BSS.
Advertise vendor specific Multi-AP capabilities in (Re)Association
Response frame, if Multi-AP functionality is enabled through the
configuration parameter.
A backhaul AP must support receiving both 3addr and 4addr frames from a
backhaul STA, so create a VLAN for it just like is done for WDS, i.e.,
by calling hostapd_set_wds_sta(). Since Multi-AP requires WPA2 (never
WEP), we can safely call hostapd_set_wds_encryption() as well and we can
reuse the entire WDS condition.
To parse the Multi-AP Extension subelement, we use get_ie(): even though
that function is meant for parsing IEs, it works for subelements.
Signed-off-by: Venkateswara Naralasetty <vnaralas@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Arnout Vandecappelle (Essensium/Mind) <arnout@mind.be>
Include and verify the OCI element in WNM-Sleep Exit Request and
Response frames. In case verification fails, the frame is silently
ignored.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
After the network changed to a new channel, perform an SA Query with the
AP after a random delay if OCV was negotiated for the association. This
is used to confirm that we are still operating on the real operating
channel of the network. This commit is adding only the station side
functionality for this, i.e., the AP behavior is not changed to
disconnect stations with OCV that do not go through SA Query.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Include an OCI element in SA Query Request and Response frames if OCV
has been negotiated.
On Linux, a kernel patch is needed to let clients correctly handle SA
Query Requests that contain an OCI element. Without this patch, the
kernel will reply to the SA Query Request itself, without verifying the
included OCI. Additionally, the SA Query Response sent by the kernel
will not include an OCI element. The correct operation of the AP does
not require a kernel patch.
Without the corresponding kernel patch, SA Query Requests sent by the
client are still valid, meaning they do include an OCI element.
Note that an AP does not require any kernel patches. In other words, SA
Query frames sent and received by the AP are properly handled, even
without a kernel patch.
As a result, the kernel patch is only required to make the client properly
process and respond to a SA Query Request from the AP. Without this
patch, the client will send a SA Query Response without an OCI element,
causing the AP to silently ignore the response and eventually disconnect
the client from the network if OCV has been negotiated to be used.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Include and verify the the OCI element in (Re)Association Request and
Response frames of the FT handshake. In case verification fails, the
handshake message is silently ignored.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Verify the received OCI element in the 4-way and group key handshakes.
If verification fails, the handshake message is silently dropped.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Use the information elements that were present in the (Re)Association
Request frame to derive the maximum bandwidth the AP will use to
transmit frames to a specific STA. By using this approach, we don't need
to query the kernel for this information, and avoid having to add a
driver API for that.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
ocv_verify_tx_params() verifies that the receive OCI element includes
field values that are compatible with the local channel configuration.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
If Operating Channel Verification is negotiated, include the OCI KDE
element in EAPOL-Key msg 2/4 and 3/4 of the 4-way handshake and both
messages of the group key handshake.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Set the OCV bit in RSN capabilities (RSNE) based on AP mode
configuration. Do the same for OSEN since it follows the RSNE field
definitions.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
APs and mesh peers use the VHT Operation element to advertise certain
channel properties (e.g., the bandwidth of the channel). Save this
information element so we can later access this information.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This adds two utility functions to convert both operating classes and
and the chan_width enum to an integer representing the channel
bandwidth. This can then be used to compare bandwidth parameters in an
uniform manner.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This function can be used to easily convert the parameters returned
by the channel_info driver API, into their corresponding operating
class and channel number.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This adds the necessary functions and callbacks to make the channel_info
driver API available to the authenticator state machine that implements
the 4-way and group key handshake. This is needed for OCV.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This adds the necessary functions and callbacks to make the channel_info
driver API available to the supplicant state machine that implements the
4-way and group key handshake. This is needed for OCV.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This adds driver API functions to get the current operating channel
parameters. This encompasses the center frequency, channel bandwidth,
frequency segment 1 index (for 80+80 channels), and so on.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This adds support for hostapd-as-RADIUS-authentication-server to request
subscription remediation for SIM-based credentials. The new hostapd.conf
parameter hs20_sim_provisioning_url is used to set the URL prefix for
the remediation server for SIM provisioning. The random
hotspot2dot0-mobile-identifier-hash value will be added to the end of
this URL prefix and the same value is stored in a new SQLite database
table sim_provisioning for the subscription server implementation to
use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Expose EAP method and IMSI from the completed (or ongoing) EAP
authentication session. These are needed for implementing Hotspot 2.0
SIM provisioning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new hostapd configuration parameter hs20_release can be used to
configure the AP to advertise a specific Hotspot 2.0 release number
instead of the latest supported release. This is mainly for testing
purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It is better not to process a new (most likely repeated) FILS HLP
request if a station retransmits (Re)Association Request frame before
the previous HLP response has either been received or timed out. The
previous implementation ended up doing this and also ended up
rescheduling the fils_hlp_timeout timer in a manner that prevented the
initial timeout from being reached if the STA continued retransmitting
the frame. This could result in failed association due to a timeout on
the station side.
Make this more robust by processing (and relaying to the server) the HLP
request once and then ignoring any new HLP request while the response
for the relayed request is still pending. The new (Re)Association
Request frames are otherwise processed, but they do not result in actual
state change on the AP side before the HLP process from the first
pending request is completed.
This fixes hwsim test case fils_sk_hlp_oom failures with unmodified
mac80211 implementation (i.e., with a relatively short retransmission
timeout for (Re)Association Request frame).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The NFC connection handover specific case of WPS public key generation
did not verify whether the two wpabuf_dup() calls succeed. Those may
return NULL due to an allocation failure and that would result in a NULL
pointer dereference in dh5_init_fixed().
Fix this by checking memory allocation results explicitly. If either of
the allocations fail, do not try to initialize wps->dh_ctx and instead,
report the failure through the existing error case handler below.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org
This allows EAP user database entries for "cert-<serial number>" to be
used for client certificate based parameters when using EAP-TLS. This
commit addresses only the full authentication case and TLS session
resumption is not yet covered.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Also add the ChangeLog entries for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant to
describe main changes between v2.6 and v2.7.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If association failed for any non-OWE specific reason, the previous
implementation tried to add the OWE related IEs into the (Re)Association
Response frame. This is not needed and could actually result in
dereferencing a NULL pointer. Fix this by adding those OWE related IEs
only for successful association and only if the RSN state machine has
been initialized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some mac80211_hwsim test cases have failed with mysterious sequence
where mac80211 has claimed the parameters are invalid ("wlan3: invalid
CW_min/CW_max: 9484/40"). Those values look strange since they are not
from hostapd configuration or default values.. hostapd is seeing TX
queue parameter set failing for queues 0, 1, and 3 (but not 2) for these
cases. Add debug prints to hostapd to get more details on what exactly
is happening if such error cases can be reproduced.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The reverse case (local identifier configured but no identifier
received) was already covered, but PKEX is not going to complete
successfully if there is any difference in identifier configuration, so
ignore this other case as well. This avoids unnecessary responses to
PKEX requests with identifier from a device that is ready for PKEX in
general, but not for that particular request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Both handle_action() and hostapd_action_rx() are used for processing
received Action frames depending on what type of driver architecture is
used (MLME in hostapd vs. driver) and which build options were used to
build hostapd. These functions had a bit different sequence for checking
the frame and printing debug prints. Make those more consistent by
checking that the frame includes the category-specific action field and
some payload. Add a debug print for both functions to make it easier to
see which path various Action frames use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid smatch warning on this even thought the only caller of the
function uses a non-NULL pointer in all cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The currently unused conf_offset parameter used a mismatching type (enum
vs. unsigned int) compared to the prototype.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Instead of going through the configuration exchange, reject invalid
legacy configurator parameters explicitly. Previously, configuring
legacy (psk/sae) parameters without psk/pass resulted in a config object
that used a zero length passphrase. With this change, that config object
is not sent and instead, either the initialization attempts is rejected
or the incoming initialization attempt is ignored.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new conf variable was used only within the CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS
block and as such, added a warning about unused variable into
non-testing builds. Fix that by using that variable outside the
conditional block as well.
Fixes: a22e235fd0 ("OWE: Add testing RSNE for OWE assoc response with driver SME/MLME")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This commit enhances QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_LINK_PROPERTIES to
also be an event, aimed to notify the link status (EX: connected
stations status on an AP link).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When external authentication is used, a specific netlink socket is used
to send the connect command. If the same socket is not used for
disconnect command, cfg80211 will discard the command. This constraint
was added into the kernel in commit bad292973363 ("nl80211: Reject
disconnect commands except from conn_owner"). That requires an update
for the hostap.git commit 40a68f3384 ("nl80211: Create a netlink
socket handle for the Connect interface").
Add a new flag into struct i802_bss to indicate if the special
nl_connect socket was used for the connect command. When sending
disconnect command this flag is tested to select the correct socket.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Add documentation to the wpa_signal_info structure.
Add a define for an invalid noise value.
Signed-off-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com>
BSS additional/removal cases were not considered at all in the previous
implementation of hostapd configuration file reloading on SIGHUP. Such
changes resulted in num_bss values getting out of sync in runtime data
and configuration data and likely dereferencing of freed memory (e.g.,
when removing a BSS).
Fix this by forcing a full disable/enable sequence for the interface if
any BSS entry is added/removed or if an interface name changes between
the old and the new configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A local memory allocation failuring during GAS Comeback Response frame
generation could result in freeing the response context without removing
it from the list. This would result in dereferencing freed memory when
processing the next comeback request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If local memory allocation for the GAS response failed, couple of error
paths ended up leaking some memory maintaining the state for the
exchange. Fix that by freeing the context properly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Back in December 2017, Jouni fixed the output side since that was
causing a kernel message to be printed, but the input side should
also be fixed, otherwise it will not work correctly on big-endian
platforms.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Parse the OSEN IE from the AP to determine values used in the AssocReq
instead of using hardcoded cipher suites. This is needed to be able to
set the group cipher based on AP advertisement now that two possible
options exists for this (GTK_NOT_USED in separate OSEN BSS; CCMP or
GTK_NOT_USED in shared BSS case). Furthermore, this is a step towards
allowing other ciphers than CCMP to be used with OSEN.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_COEX_CONFIG vendor command
to set the priorities among different types of traffic of
WLAN/BT/Zigbee during coex scenarios.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add interface for drivers to report changes in TX/RX throughput
dynamically to user space. This information can be used by userspace
tools to tune kernel's TCP parameters in order to achieve peak
throughput. The driver may optionally provide guidance on which TCP
parameters to be configured for optimal performance along with the
values to be configured.
The TCP parameters that need to be tuned for peak performance are not
interface specific. Based on the guidance from the driver and
considering the other interfaces that may be affected with the new
configurations, a userspace tool has to choose the values to be
configured for these parameters to achieve optimal performance across
interfaces.
The throughput levels informed by the driver with this event are only
for providing guidance on TCP parameter tuning from userspace. The
driver may change the thresholds used to decide low or medium or high
throughput levels based on several parameters based on the PHY layer
capacity in the current connection, the number of packets being
dispatched per second, or the number of packets pending in queues, etc.
The throughput levels may not be consistent with the actual throughput
of the link.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attribute to configure action
frame transmission in HE trigger based PPDU.
This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attribute to configure HE
single user PPDU transmission.
This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attributes to configure HE
operating mode control field bandwidth, number of spatial streams, and
UL MU disable configuration. Define a new attribute to clear the
previously set HE OM control field configuration. This is used for
testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not try to determine the length of the T&C Server URL before checking
that the URL is available. This got broken in a change to move the
handling to the AS. hostapd could potentially have hit a NULL pointer
dereference if the authentication server sent an unconsistent set of T&C
information.
Fixes: d4e39c51f8 ("HS 2.0: Move Terms and Conditions Server URL generation from AP to AS")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Earlier, the OCE flags were checked during hostapd initialization. This
doesn't address few cases like for example when the interface is added
from control interface. Move the OCE flag checks to the functions that
are forming the MBO/OCE IEs to cover all the different paths for
enabling a BSS. Also use macros as appropriate for readability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add support for negotiating WNM Collocated Interference Reporting. This
allows hostapd to request associated STAs to report their collocated
interference information and wpa_supplicant to process such request and
reporting. The actual values (Collocated Interference Report Elements)
are out of scope of hostapd and wpa_supplicant, i.e., external
components are expected to generated and process these.
For hostapd/AP, this mechanism is enabled by setting
coloc_intf_reporting=1 in configuration. STAs are requested to perform
reporting with "COLOC_INTF_REQ <addr> <Automatic Report Enabled> <Report
Timeout>" control interface command. The received reports are indicated
as control interface events "COLOC-INTF-REPORT <addr> <dialog token>
<hexdump of report elements>".
For wpa_supplicant/STA, this mechanism is enabled by setting
coloc_intf_reporting=1 in configuration and setting Collocated
Interference Report Elements as a hexdump with "SET coloc_intf_elems
<hexdump>" control interface command. The hexdump can contain one or
more Collocated Interference Report Elements (each including the
information element header). For additional testing purposes, received
requests are reported with "COLOC-INTF-REQ <dialog token> <automatic
report enabled> <report timeout>" control interface events and
unsolicited reports can be sent with "COLOC_INTF_REPORT <hexdump>".
This commit adds support for reporting changes in the collocated
interference (Automatic Report Enabled == 1 and partial 3), but not for
periodic reports (2 and other part of 3).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If driver supports self-managed regulatory domain, read reg-domain
information for that specific wiphy interface instead the global
information which may be different which such drivers. This fixes issues
where a regulatory update with a self-managed regulatory domain driver
ended up building incorrect list of supported channels for upper layer
hostapd/wpa_supplicant operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a flag indicating if the device has the self-managed regulatory
support. Set the flag if NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_SELF_MANAGED_REG attribute
is set when reading wiphy info.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
On Linux this flag will make sure that no file descriptor is
accidentally leaked into potential child processes. While this is not a
problem right now, it is considered to be good practice these days when
dealing with file descriptors on Linux.
Signed-off-by: Karol Babioch <karol@babioch.de>
Previously the file permissions for the debug log file were not
explicitly set. Instead it was implicitly relying on a secure umask,
which in most cases would result in a file that is world-readable. This
is a violation of good practices, since not every user should have
access to sensitive information that might be contained in the debug log
file.
Explicitly set sane default file permissions in case the file is newly
created.
Unfortunately the fopen(3) function does not provide such a facility, so
the approach needs to be changed in the following way:
1) The file descriptor needs to be created manually using the open(3)
function with the correct flags and the desired mode set.
2) fdopen(3) can then be used on the file descriptor to associate a file
stream with it.
Note: This modification will not change the file permissions of any
already existing debug log files, and only applies to newly created
ones.
Signed-off-by: Karol Babioch <karol@babioch.de>
In case the protocol used for the BSS is WPA, the WPA vendor IE should
be placed after all the non vendor IEs. Fix this for Beacon and Probe
Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Previously, when an AP interface was disabled through a control
interface DISABLE command during a channel switch window, the interface
could not be reenabled due to beacon setup failure (which validates if
CSA is in progress).
Fix this by clearing channel switch parameters while disabling the
hostapd interface.
Signed-off-by: Sriram R <srirrama@codeaurora.org>
Add NAN NDP attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_PEER_NDPE_SUPPORT which
indicates if NDP remote peer supports NDPE attribute or not.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is something useful to know and also eliminates format truncation
warnings.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
hash variable is allocated memory using eap_pwd_h_init(), but there are
couple of error case code paths which skips deallocation of hash. The
memory of hash is deallocated using eap_pwd_h_final(). Fix this by
calling eap_pwd_h_final() at the end of the function if execution got
there through one of those error cases.
Signed-off-by: Nishant Chaprana <n.chaprana@samsung.com>
When moving a 5 GHz VHT AP to 2.4 GHz band with VHT disabled through the
hostapd control interface DISABLE/reconfig/ENABLE commands, enabling of
the AP on 2.4 GHz failed due to the previously configured VHT capability
being compared with hardware VHT capability on 2.4 GHz band:
hw vht capab: 0x0, conf vht capab: 0x33800132
Configured VHT capability [VHT_CAP_MAX_MPDU_LENGTH_MASK] exceeds max value supported by the driver (2 > 0)
ap: interface state DISABLED->DISABLED
Since VHT (ieee80211ac) config is already disabled for the 2.4 GHz band,
add fix this by validating vht_capab only when VHT is enabled.
Fixes: c781eb8428 ("hostapd: Verify VHT capabilities are supported by driver")
Signed-off-by: Sathishkumar Muruganandam <murugana@codeaurora.org>
Previous implementation ended up triggering PMF check for previous
association and SA Query procedure incorrectly in cases where there is a
STA entry in hostapd, but that STA is not in associated state. This
resulted in undesired temporary rejection of the association with status
code 30.
This ended up breaking OWE group negotiation when PMF is in use since
the check for the OWE group would have happened only after this earlier
PMF check and rejection (i.e., the station got status code 30 instead of
the expected 77).
For example, when the AP is configured with OWE group 21 and a station
tries groups 19, 20, and 21 (in this sequence), the first two
Association Request frames should be rejected with status code 77.
However, only the first one got that status code while the second one
got status code 30 due to that issue with PMF existing association
check.
Furthermore, hostapd was continuing with SA Query procedure with
unencrypted Action frames in this type of case even though there was no
existing association (and obviously, not an encryption key either).
Fix this by checking that the STA entry is in associated state before
initiating SA Query procedure based on the PMF rules.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Kumar <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
Without this patch sae_require_mfp is always activate, when ieee80211w
is set to optional all stations negotiating SAEs are being rejected when
they do not support PMF. With this patch hostapd only rejects these
stations in case sae_require_mfp is set to some value and not null.
Fixes ba3d435fe4 ("SAE: Add option to require MFP for SAE associations")
Signed-off-by: Hauke Mehrtens <hauke@hauke-m.de>
This message was printed and MSG_INFO level which would be more
reasonable for error cases where hostapd has accepted authentication.
However, this is not really an error case for the cases where
authentication was rejected (e.g., due to MAC ACL). Drop this to use
MSG_DEBUG level.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When Probe Request frame handling was extended to use MAC ACL through
ieee802_11_allowed_address(), the MSG_INFO level log print ("Station
<addr> not allowed to authenticate") from that function ended up getting
printed even for Probe Request frames. That was not by design and it can
result in excessive logging and MSG_INFO level if MAC ACL is used.
Fix this by printing this log entry only for authentication and
association frames. In addition, drop the priority of that log entry to
MSG_DEBUG since this is not really an unexpected behavior in most MAC
ACL use cases.
Fixes: 92eb00aec2 ("Extend ACL check for Probe Request frames")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
With new restriction in Android, if PATH env variable doesn't have
correct path of 'am' binary, execv() fails to launch wpadebug browser
(am starts, but something seems to fail within its internal processing).
This commit is a workaround to use execve() with custom environment PATH
which includes "/system/bin;/vendor/bin" to handle the cases where
hs20-osu-client fails to launch wpadebug browser through /system/bin/am.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a subcommand for Channel Frequency Response (CFG) Capture
Configuration and define attributes for configuring CFR capture
parameters per peer and enabling/disabling CFR capture.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends the last_msk testing functionality in the RADIUS server to
work with EAP-TLS based on "cert-<serial_num>" form user names in the
database.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be used to fetch the serial number of the peer certificate in
the EAP server. For now, this is implemented only with OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend hostapd to allow the new OSU Provider NAI List ANQP-element to be
advertised in addition to the previously used OSU Providers list
ANQP-element. The new osu_nai2 configurator parameter option is used to
specify the OSU_NAI value for the shared BSS (Single SSID) case while
osu_nai remains to be used for the separate OSU BSS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Driver/firmware does roam scan when it finds the need to roam to a
different BSS. Add a QCA vendor event to indicate such roam scan events
from driver/firmware to user space.
Please note that some drivers may not send these events in few cases,
e.g., if the host processor is sleeping when this event is generated in
firmware to avoid undesired wakeups.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
PMKID derivation with the Suite B AKMs is a special case compared to
other AKMs since that derivation uses KCK instead of PMK as an input.
This means that the PMKSA cache entry can be added only after KCK has
been derived during 4-way handshake. This also means that PMKID would
change every time 4-way handshake is repeated even when maintaining the
same PMK (i.e., during PTK rekeying and new associations even if they
use PMKSA caching).
wpa_supplicant was previously replacing the PMKSA cache entry whenever a
new PMKID was derived. This did not match hostapd expectations on the AP
side since hostapd did not update the PMKSA cache entry after it was
created. Consequently, PMKSA caching could be used only once (assuming
no PTK rekeying happened before that). Fix this by making wpa_supplicant
behave consistently with hostapd, i.e., by adding the Suite B PMKSA
cache entries with the PMKID from the very first 4-way handshake
following PMK derivation and then not updating the PMKID.
IEEE Std 802.11-2016 is somewhat vague in this area and it seems to
allow both cases to be used (initial PMKID or any consecutive PMKID
derived from the same PMK). While both cases could be supported that
would result in significantly more complex implementation and need to
store multiple PMKID values. It looks better to clarify the standard to
explicitly note that only the first PMKID derived after PMK derivation
is used (i.e., match the existing hostapd implementation).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The external session_id and emsk from eap_proxy_get_eap_session_id() and
eap_proxy_get_emsk() need to be freed consistently in all code paths
within eap_peer_erp_init() and outside it in the case ERP is not
initialized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The temporary EC_POINT 'sum' needs to be freed at the end of the
function with the other OpenSSL allocations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It looks like at least OpenSSL 1.1.0i includes the extra checks in
EC_POINT_set_affine_coordinates_GFp() that break the previously used
mechanism for generating invalid keys. Fix this by using the alternative
design that was used with OpenSSL 1.1.1 and BoringSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Parse the Venue URL ANQP-element payload and report it with the new
RX-VENUE-URL event messages if the query was done using PMF.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
CONFIG_RADIUS_TEST builds can now update the user SQLite database based
on authentication result from the last attempt. If the database has a
last_msk column, that will be set to the hexdump of the MSK whenever
authentication succeeds and to "FAIL" whenever authentication fails.
This can be used for testing purposes by having an external program
track authentication status per user.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This fixes some validation issues against DM_ddf DTD that were caused by
the conversion from the internal tree structure to TNDS. Only the leaf
nodes are supposed to have the Value node.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define a new QCA vendor specific test config attribute to configure the
support for receiving the MPDU with operating mode control subfield.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Check if the device supports specific mandatory features and set the the
relevant WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_OCE_STA flag. Send the relevant scan
parameters for OCE scans.
Signed-off-by: Roee Zamir <roee.zamir@intel.com>
Add a flag to scan parameters that enables OCE scan features. If this
flag is set the device should enable the following features as defined
in the Optimized Connectivity Experience Technical Specification v1.0:
- Overwrite FILS request Max Channel Time with actual value (clause 3.8)
- Send Probe Request frame in high rate (at least 5.5 Mbps) (clause 3.12)
- Probe Request frame Transmission Deferral and Suppression (clause 3.5)
- Accept broadcast Probe Response frame (clause 3.6)
Signed-off-by: Roee Zamir <roee.zamir@intel.com>
If you modify the WLAN-STA-AUTHORIZED bit in sta->flags, you have to
call the ap_sta_set_authorized() function to make sure the corresponding
event is sent over the control interface. Otherwise we leak entries in
the event history.
Signed-off-by: Andreas Tobler <andreas.tobler@cloudguard.ch>
When CONFIG_OWE is enabled but none of 11R/11W/FILS are enabled hostapd
(and wpa_supplicant with AP mode support) build failed. Fix this by
adding OWE to the list of conditions for including the local variables.
Signed-off-by: Chaitanya T K <chaitanya.mgit@gmail.com>
Commit 3f53c006c7 ('nl80211: Ignore
disconnect event in case of locally generated request') made
wpa_supplicant ignore the next received disconnect event for cases where
wpa_supplicant itself requested a disconnection. This can result in
ignoring a disconnection notification in some cases.
Considering a P2P Client receiving disconnect event from the kernel
after a P2P group is started, drv->ignore_next_local_disconnect is
cleared to 0, then wpa_driver_nl80211_disconnect() will be called during
the removal of the group, in which drv->ignore_next_local_disconnect is
set to 1 by mistake.
Do not allow ignore_next_local_{disconnect,deauth} to be set to 1 if the
driver is not in associated state (drv->associated is 0) to avoid this
type of cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This enhances DPP_AUTH_INIT, DPP_CONFIGURATOR_SIGN, and SET
dpp_configurator_params to allow optional setting of the DPP groupId
string for a Connector. If the value is not set, the previously wildcard
value ("*") is used by default.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The payload used for the existing NAN vendor command,
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_NAN is a binary blob of data. This
command is not extendable to send additional information. Hence
define a new vendor command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_NAN_EXT,
that can carry the binary blob encapsulated within an attribute
and can carry additional attributes to enhance the NAN command
interface. Define additional 3 new attributes for conveying
type of NAN subcmd and channel information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Present implementation of NAN vendor command does not use
attribute encapsulation for sending the command from userspace
to the driver, payload is directly sent as is. Attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_NAN is used only for receiving vendor
events in the userspace from the driver. Update the doc as per
this implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The max supported ADDBA buffer size value is 256, so change
the buffer size attribute type to U16 to configure the testbed
device to use the 256 buffer size in ADDBA negotiation in 11ax
testing.
This attribute is used only to configure a testbed device and the old
definition of this attribute was not used in any deployed implementation
hence it is still justifiable to change the definition.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_GSCAN_MAX_BLACKLIST_BSSID to get maximum
blacklist BSSIDs capability from the driver for gscan.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The WDS-STA-INTERFACE-ADDED/WDS-STA-INTERFACE-REMOVED events were always
sent to the first BSS instead of the specific BSS that the STA was
connected to in multi-BSS cases. Fix this by using the BSS specific
context pointer.
Fixes: 1952b626ba ("hostapd: Add ctrl iface indications for WDS STA interface")
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@codeaurora.org>
GCM-AES-256 cipher suite is defined in IEEE Std 802.1AEbn-2011.
If authenticator configured as GCM-AES-256, the distributed SAK will be
256 bits indicated by the GCM-AES-256 ID in the MKA packet.
This patch will make AES Key Unwrap to 32 bytes of SAK when identify the
ID.
Signed-off-by: xiaofeis <xiaofeis@codeaurora.org>
This allows WEP mode AP to be re-enabled automatically after external
ifconfig down + up on netdev used by hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
SSL_session_reused() is the same as the deprecated SSL_cache_hit(). The
engine load stuff is now handled by OPENSSL_init().
Signed-off-by: Rosen Penev <rosenp@gmail.com>
Make it clear that the consideration should be only for the IBSS case
and in infrastructure BSS case, PMKID KDE should not be added due to
risks involved with exposing this to stations that do not know the
passphrase.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Ignore unauthenticated encrypted EAPOL-Key data in supplicant
processing. When using WPA2, these are frames that have the Encrypted
flag set, but not the MIC flag.
When using WPA2, EAPOL-Key frames that had the Encrypted flag set but
not the MIC flag, had their data field decrypted without first verifying
the MIC. In case the data field was encrypted using RC4 (i.e., when
negotiating TKIP as the pairwise cipher), this meant that
unauthenticated but decrypted data would then be processed. An adversary
could abuse this as a decryption oracle to recover sensitive information
in the data field of EAPOL-Key messages (e.g., the group key).
(CVE-2018-14526)
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Add a new test config QCA vendor attribute to override the MU EDCA
parameters to default values in the driver for test configuration. This
is used for configuring the testbed device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The last character of the STA MAC address got replaced with 0x00 due to
truncation if the @1@ macro was used at the end of the URL. Fix this
case by allocating larger buffer for the URL.
Fixes: d4e39c51f8 ("HS 2.0: Move Terms and Conditions Server URL generation from AP to AS")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attribute to configure HE
trigger frame MAC padding duration value in the driver.
This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
ifname is checked for interface down event in commit
106fa1e97e ("nl80211: Indicate
interface-down event only for the main netdev"). Do the same for
interface up event to avoid unexpected notifications when the master
interface (e.g., a bridge interface) is set up while then WLAN interface
remains down.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When we start hostapd having Hotspot 2.0 configuration with interface
already added to bridge interface, addition and deletion of new neighbor
to bridge ip neighbor table fails.
This is since 'bss->added_if_into_bridge' is not set which only allows
'drv->rtnl_sk' (nl_sock for NETLINK_ROUTE) allocation needed for bridge
ip neighbor table.
Add a new bit 'already_in_bridge' and set it when interface is already
added to bridge by some external component. Check this bit in addition
to 'bss->added_if_into_bridge' for 'drv->rtnl_sk' allocation done in
i802_init().
Now 'drv->rtnl_sk' is closed in wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit() regardless of
'bss->added_if_into_bridge' since when we have 'bss->already_in_bridge'
case too, this need to be removed.
brctl show
bridge name bridge id STP enabled interfaces
br0 8000.8efdf006b050 no ap
hostapd_cli raw STATUS-DRIVER
Selected interface 'ap'
ifindex=15
ifname=ap
brname=br0
addr=8e:fd:f0:06:b0:50
freq=5180
beacon_set=1
already_in_bridge=1
..
Signed-off-by: Sathishkumar Muruganandam <murugana@codeaurora.org>
Since the generic DFS offload support flag is added as
NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_DFS_OFFLOAD, only use the vendor command to check
DFS capablity if the flag is not already set.
Signed-off-by: Peng Xu <pxu@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attributes to configure
HE MU EDCA parameters value in the driver.
This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attribute to configure Tx
beamformee number of space-time streams value in the driver.
This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new DAC_REQUEST control interface command can now be used to request
hostapd to send out Disconnect-Request and CoA-Request packets for an
existing session.
DAC_REQUEST <disconnect|coa> <MAC Address> [t_c_clear]
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows hostapd DAS to be configured to allow any DAC (with the
matching shared secret) to send Disconnect-Request and CoA-Request
packets.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be used to track active sessions, e.g., for the purpose of
issuing RADIUS DAS commands (Disconnect-Request or CoA-Request).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it more convenient to generate the URL in a way that
interoperates between different vendors. The AP is simply copying the
already constructed URL as-is from Access-Accept to WNM-Notification.
This means that the HO AAA can generate the URL in a manner that works
for the associated T&C Server without having to coordinate with each AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
In the infrastructure BSS case, the AP needs to clear pending SAE state
if a new Commit message is received when already in Committed state.
This allows the non-AP STA to negotiate a new group if it ends up trying
to go through SAE authentication again before the AP side has removed
the previous STA entry.
This fixes an issue where a kernel update changed something in SAE
timing or authentication sequence and started failing the
sae_bignum_failure hwsim test case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When removing an interface, hostapd_bss_deinit() frees all associated
STAs. If any of the stations is 40MHz intolerant, the cleanup invokes
ht40_intolerant_remove(), that in turn registers a 20->40MHz transition
timer for the last station (ap_ht2040_timeout() function). That timer is
never canceled; once it executes, the interface is gone, most likely
resulting in a segfault when referencing it.
While hostapd_interface_deinit() cancels the transition timer, it does
so before cleaning up STAs. Move the cancellation after STA cleanup to
cancel any timer that was registered during that operation.
Signed-off-by: Martin Willi <martin@strongswan.org>
Handle NL80211_CMD_WIPHY_REG_CHANGE the same way as the
NL80211_CMD_REG_CHANGE event. The wiphy-specific event is generated by
the cfg80211 reg_process_self_managed_hints() function, e.g., when going
through regulatory_set_wiphy_regd_sync_rtnl(). Previously, such events
were ignored completely in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The AKM 00-0F-AC:13 is supposed to use cryptographic algorithms
consistently, but the current IEEE 802.11 standard is not doing so for
the key names: PMKID (uses SHA-1), PMKR0Name/PMKR1Name (uses SHA-256).
The PMKID case was already implemented with SHA-384 and this commit
replaces use of SHA-256 with SHA-384 for PMKR0Name/PMKR1Name derivation
to be consistent in SHA-384. While this is not compliant with the
current IEEE 802.11 standard, this is clearly needed to meet CNSA Suite
requirements. Matching change is being proposed in REVmd to get the IEEE
802.11 standard to meet the use case requirements.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
A new SAE Commit message should not be allowed to drop an existing STA
entry since the sender of that Commit message cannot be authenticated
before receiving the Confirm message. This is important in particular
when PMF is used since this would provide a potential new path for
forcing a connection to be dropped.
Fix this by allowing a new SAE Authentication instance to be started
when the old instance is in Accepted state and the new Commit message
does not use the same peer-scalar value (checked in
sae_parse_commit_scalar()). When PMF is used, the AP will use SA Query
procedure when receiving the (Re)Association Request frame. In theory,
that step could be skipped in case of SAE Authentication since the
non-AP STA is demonstrating knowledge of the password. Anyway, there is
no allowance for that exception in the IEEE 802.11 standard, so at least
for now, leave this using SA Query procedure just like any other PMF
case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
wpa_supplicant was hardcoded to use BIP-CMAC-128 in FT protocol if PMF
was enabled. Extend that to allow the other BIP algorithms to be used as
well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd was hardcoded to use 128-bit IGTK in FT protocol (IGTK
subelement in FTE). Extend that to allow 256-bit IGTK (i.e.,
BIP-CMAC-256 and BIP-GMAC-256) to be used as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of sending out a partially completed frame, abort the
association process if something unexpected happens and remove the STA
entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When support for KCK2 and KEK2 was added, both keys were derived for
FT-FILS cases, but only KCK2 was actually used. Add similar changes to
use KEK2 to protect GTK/IGTK in FTE with using FT-FILS AKMs.
This fixes AES key wrapping to use the correct key. The change is not
backwards compatible.
Fixes: 2f37387812 ("FILS: Add more complete support for FT-FILS use cases")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When building an RRB message, a failure in wpa_ft_rrb_lin() calls could
have resulted in trying to free an uninitialized pointer. Fix this by
initializing *packet to NULL before going through the initial steps.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
SHA384-based FT AKM uses longer keys, so the RRB receive processing for
push and pull response messages needs to be able to accept variable
length PMK-R1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The MIC field is now a variable length field, so make FTE generation in
hostapd aware of the two different field lengths.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The MIC field is now a variable length field, so make FTE generation in
wpa_supplicant aware of the two different field lengths.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This defines key lengths for SHA384-based FT AKM and handles writing and
parsing for RSNE AKMs with the new value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new label string for TLS-Exporter was taken into use for MSK
derivation, but it was missed from EMSK deriation in the server side
implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The label strings used for deriving Key_Material with TLS v1.3 were
changed, so update the implementation to match the new values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
New WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS have been added but corresponding lookup
strings for driver_flags command were never added. Add the
missing strings.
Signed-off-by: Mikael Kanstrup <mikael.kanstrup@sony.com>
If time_advertisement=2 is included in hostapd configuration, but
time_zone is unset, the previous implementation tried to write the Time
Zone element into management frames. This resulted in segmentation fault
when trying to dereference a NULL pointer. Fix that by skipping addition
of this element when time_zone parameter is not set.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
Add mesh type to nl80211 channel switch request, so mesh is able to send
the request to kernel drivers.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <peter.oh@bowerswilkins.com>
This allows a single BSS/SSID to be used for both data connection and
OSU. In wpa_supplicant configuration, the current proto=OSEN
key_mgmt=OSEN combination is now allowing both the old separate OSEN
BSS/IE and the new RSN-OSEN to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows a single BSS/SSID to be used for both data connection and
OSU. Instead of hostapd configuration osen=1, wpa_key_mgmt=OSEN (or more
likely, wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP OSEN) is used to enable this new option.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Before calling HW macsec driver API, be_to_host16() should be used to
reverse the SCI port byte order. This was broken as part of the mka API
changes.
Fixes: 8ebfc7c2ba ("mka: Pass full structures down to macsec drivers' transmit SC ops")
Signed-off-by: xiaofeis <xiaofeis@codeaurora.org>
Run through the hunting-and-pecking loop 40 times to mask the time
necessary to find PWE. The odds of PWE not being found in 40 loops is
roughly 1 in 1 trillion.
Signed-off-by: Dan Harkins <dharkins@lounge.org>
Aborty processing if ID exchange processing is entered twice
unexpectedly. This avoids memory leaks in the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These changes add support for salted password databases to EAP-pwd per
RFC 8146. This commits introduces the framework for enabling this and
the actual salting mechanisms are introduced in the following commits.
Signed-off-by: Dan Harkins <dharkins@lounge.org>
There is no need to do this during the ID exchange, so move PWE
deriation into the following commit exchange in preparation for adding
support for salted passwords.
Signed-off-by: Dan Harkins <dharkins@lounge.org>
These changes add support for salted password databases to EAP-pwd per
RFC 8146. This commits introduces the framework for enabling this and
the salting mechanisms based on SHA-1, SHA256, and SHA512 hash
algorithms.
Signed-off-by: Dan Harkins <dharkins@lounge.org>
This commit adds a new vendor command attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_GTX in
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SET_WIFI_CONFIGURATION to enable/disable green
Tx power saving feature.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Move enum fst_reason to be a top level type, since it is used as
argument in the function fst_reason_name() and having it as nested
type caused a compile error when fst_ctrl_aux.h was included from
a C++ source file.
Signed-off-by: Lior David <liord@codeaurora.org>
This extends the SAE implementation in both infrastructure and mesh BSS
cases to allow an optional Password Identifier to be used. This uses the
mechanism added in P802.11REVmd/D1.0. The Password Identifier is
configured in a wpa_supplicant network profile as a new string parameter
sae_password_id. In hostapd configuration, the existing sae_password
parameter has been extended to allow the password identifier (and also a
peer MAC address) to be set. In addition, multiple sae_password entries
can now be provided to hostapd to allow multiple per-peer and
per-identifier passwords to be set.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add NAN attributes to communicate IPv6 address, port, and protocol
between wifihal and host driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The n argument to this function is number of bits, not bytes, to shift.
As such, need to use mp_rshb() instead of mp_rshd(). This fixes EAP-pwd
with P-521 curve.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, hostapd CHAN_SWITCH command did not effect VHT configuration
for the following:
When VHT is currently disabled (ieee80211ac=0),
1. hostapd_cli -p /var/run/hostapd chan_switch 10 5180 \
sec_channel_offset=1 center_freq1=5190 bandwidth=40 ht
====> Comes up in HT40
2. hostapd_cli -p /var/run/hostapd chan_switch 10 5765 \
sec_channel_offset=-1 center_freq1=5775 bandwidth=40 vht
====> Comes up in HT40
3. hostapd_cli -p /var/run/hostapd chan_switch 10 5200 center_freq1=5200 \
bandwidth=20 vht
====> Comes up in HT20
When VHT is currently enabled (ieee80211ac=1),
1. hostapd_cli -p /var/run/hostapd chan_switch 10 5180 \
sec_channel_offset=1 center_freq1=5190 bandwidth=40 ht
====> Comes up in VHT40
2. hostapd_cli -p /var/run/hostapd chan_switch 10 5200 center_freq1=5200 \
bandwidth=20 ht
====> Comes up in VHT20
This is since VHT config from chan_switch is processed only for
bandwidths 80 and above (80P80, 160) and for VHT20, VHT40 cases, only
NLA chan type and chan width are updated.
There is no NL attribute for determining if it is HT or VHT for
bandwidths 20 & 40 and currently they are updated as HT20, HT40 (+ or -
depending on offset). Same is notified back via
NL80211_CMD_CH_SWITCH_NOTIFY.
Instead of adding new NL attribute for tracking HT/VHT enabled config,
we are adding new hostapd VHT config parameter to save the chan_switch
config and use only for chan_switch case of VHT20 and VHT40.
Tested with all combinations of chan_switch (noHT->20->40->80->) HT/VHT
and confirmed to be working.
Signed-off-by: Sathishkumar Muruganandam <murugana@codeaurora.org>
When the channel time is zero the interference factor calculation falls
under divide by zero operation which results in invalid (NaN =
not-a-number) interference factor value. This leads to wrong ideal
channel selection in ACS during the scenario described below.
Scenario:
In VHT80 mode, the channel 36 (first channel) gets the channel time as
zero which causes the interfactor factor to be an invalid number (NaN).
Any operations (like addition, mulitplication, divide, etc.) with NaN
value results in a NaN value, so that average factor for the primary
channel 36 got the invalid value (NaN). Since channel 36 is the first
channel, ideal factor is assigned as NaN in the first iteration. The
following iteration condition check (factor < ideal_factor) with a NaN
value fail for all other primary channels. This results in channel 36
being chosen as the ideal channel in ACS which holds a NaN value.
Logs:
ACS: Survey analysis for channel 36 (5180 MHz)
ACS: 1: min_nf=-103 interference_factor=nan nf=0 time=0 busy=0 rx=0
ACS: 2: min_nf=-103 interference_factor=0.615385 nf=-102 time=13 busy=8 rx=0
ACS: 3: min_nf=-103 interference_factor=2.45455 nf=0 time=22 busy=16 rx=0
ACS: 4: min_nf=-103 interference_factor=0.785714 nf=-103 time=42 busy=33 rx=0
ACS: 5: min_nf=-103 interference_factor=nan nf=0 time=0 busy=0 rx=0
ACS: * interference factor average: nan
...
ACS: * channel 36: total interference = nan
..
ACS: * channel 149: total interference = 5.93174e-21
..
ACS: Ideal channel is 36 (5180 MHz) with total interference factor of nan
Signed-off-by: Karthikeyan Periyasamy <periyasa@codeaurora.org>
Over time a number of style issues have crept into qca-vendor.h,
so fix most of them. There are some identifiers and comments which
exceed 80 columns, but these are left as-is for readability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be used to determine which mechanism to use for configuring
country code from trusted sources.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wifi test config QCA vendor attribute to configure Tx
beamformee in the driver. This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The first two parameters to readlink() are marked restricted and at
least gcc 8.2 warns about used the same pointer for then, so avoid this
by using separate buffers for the pathname and response buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Reword the comments to make gcc 8.1 recognize these as designed cases
and not trigger implicit-fallthrough warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Implement tls_connection_get_eap_fast_key() using cryptographic
primitives as wolfSSL implements different spec.
Signed-off-by: Sean Parkinson <sean@wolfssl.com>
Depend on proper wolfSSL configuration instead of trying to define these
build configuration values externally.
Signed-off-by: Sean Parkinson <sean@wolfssl.com>
Use the correct intermediate result from mp_sqrmod() in the following
mp_mulmod() call (t is not initialized here; it is used only after this
step).
Signed-off-by: Sean Parkinson <sean@wolfssl.com>
Provide full uncompressed DER data length to wc_ecc_import_point_der()
even though a compressed form is used here. In addition, use
ECC_POINT_COMP_* defined values to make this more readable.
Signed-off-by: Sean Parkinson <sean@wolfssl.com>
The current EAP peer implementation is not yet ready for the TLS v1.3
changes with EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-FAST, so disable TLS v1.3 for
this EAP method for now.
While the current EAP-TLS implementation is more or less complete for
TLS v1.3, there has been no interoperability testing with other
implementations, so disable for by default for now until there has been
chance to confirm that no significant interoperability issues show up
with TLS version update. tls_flags=[ENABLE-TLSv1.3] configuration
parameter can be used to enable TLS v1.3 (assuming the TLS library
supports it; e.g., when using OpenSSL 1.1.1).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current EAP peer implementation is not yet ready for the TLS v1.3
changes with EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-FAST, so disable TLS v1.3 for
this EAP method for now.
While the current EAP-TLS implementation is more or less complete for
TLS v1.3, there has been no interoperability testing with other
implementations, so disable for by default for now until there has been
chance to confirm that no significant interoperability issues show up
with TLS version update. phase1="tls_disable_tlsv1_3=0" configuration
parameter can be used to enable TLS v1.3 (assuming the TLS library
supports it; e.g., when using OpenSSL 1.1.1).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This may be needed to avoid interoperability issues with the new
protocol version and significant changes for EAP use cases in both key
derivation and handshake termination.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes this more easily available throughout the handshake
processing, if needed, compared to having to pass through the function
argument through the full path from
tls_connection{,_server}_handshake().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EAP session cannot be marked fully completed on sending Client
Finished with TLS v1.3 since the server may still send NewSessionTicket
before EAP-Success.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
With TLS v1.3, the Finished message from the client can require
fragmentation. Postpone key derivation and marking of the EAP session
fully completed until all the fragments of that last message are sent to
avoid losing all the subsequent fragments.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This value is going to be used only with a helper function that takes it
in as a const value, so use the same style here to simplify callers in
upcoming TLS v1.3 changes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 1.1.1 added cases where ClientHello generation may fail due to
"no ciphers available". There is no point in sending out the resulting
TLS Alert message to the server since the server does not know what to
do with it before ClientHello. Instead, simply terminate the TLS
handshake locally and report EAP failure to avoid getting stuck waiting
for a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL started reporting failures from
EC_POINT_set_affine_coordinates_GFp() similarly to BoringSSL, so use the
same workaround to enable this protocol testing case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new SQLite table pending_tc is used to maintain a list of sessions
that need to accept Terms and Conditions. This information can be used
on an external Terms and Conditions server to map the incoming MAC
address information into user identity.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add commands to allow an AP to configure filtering rules to capture
frames from stations that are active on the operating channel, but
not associated to this AP. Operations include add/delete the filter
and get the statistics information of the unassociated stations.
Signed-off-by: Karthikeyan Periyasamy <periyasa@codeaurora.org>
Allow hostapd RADIUS authentication server with SQLite EAP user DB to be
used for testing Terms and Conditions functionality. This could be used
for the HO AAA part of functionality (merging HO AAA and SP AAA into a
single component to avoid separate RADIUS proxy in testing setup).
A T&C server with HTTPS processing is needed to allow this to be used
for full over-the-air testing. This commit adds sufficient functionality
to allow hwsim test cases to cover the RADIUS server part.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend RADIUS DAS to support CoA-Request packets for the case where the
HS 2.0 Terms And Conditions filtering VSA is used to remove filtering.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Mark a channel as required DFS based on regulatory information received
from the driver/kernel rather than deciding based on hardcoded
boundaries on the frequency. Previously few channels were being marked
as requiring DFS even though they were non-DFS in a particular country.
If the driver does not provide channel list information, fall back to
the previously used frequency-based determination.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend wpa_supplicant WNM-Notification RX handling to parse and process
received Terms and Conditions Acceptance notifications. If PMF is
enabled for the association, this frame results in control interface
indication (HS20-T-C-ACCEPTANCE <URL>) to get upper layers to guide the
user through the required acceptance steps.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd Access-Accept processing to check if the RADIUS
server indicated that Terms and Conditions Acceptance is required. The
new hs20_t_c_server_url parameter is used to specify the server URL
template that the STA is requested to visit.
This commit does not enable any kind of filtering, i.e., only the part
of forwarding a request from Access-Accept to the STA using
WNM-Notification is covered.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd with two new configuration parameters
(hs20_t_c_filename and hs20_t_c_timestamp) that can be used to specify
that the Terms and Conditions attributes are to be added into all
Access-Request messages for Hotspot 2.0 STAs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows user to get event indication when a new interface is
added/removed for 4addr WDS STA and also WDS STA ifname is informed
through the STA command.
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@codeaurora.org>
While it is unlikely that FILS would be used without PMF or SAE in the
build, it is possible to generate such a build and as such, it would be
good for the KDF selection to work properly. Add CONFIG_FILS as an
independent condition for the SHA256-based KDF. Previously, this
combination would have resulted in failure to derive keys and terminated
key management exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When AP initialization is completed in a callback (e.g., OBSS scan),
wpa_supplicant_deinit_ap() is not called in case of failure. Fix this by
calling setup_complete_cb in case of failure, too, which in turn calls
wpa_supplicant_deinit_ap() if needed.
Signed-off-by: Tova Mussai <tova.mussai@intel.com>
Add WPA FT auth to connect params in case of a re-connection to ESS
supporting FT when FT was used in the first connect.
Signed-off-by: Ahmad Masri <amasri@codeaurora.org>
Add MDE (mobility domain element) to Association Request frame IEs in
the driver assoc params. wpa_supplicant will add MDE only if the network
profile allows FT, the selected AP supports FT, and the mobility domain
ID matches.
Signed-off-by: Ahmad Masri <amasri@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd processing of (Re)Association Request frames to
store a local copy of the Consortium OI within the Roaming Consortium
Selection element, if present, and then add that in HS 2.0 Roaming
Consortium attribute into RADIUS Access-Request messages.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd Hotspot 2.0 implementation to allow operator icons
to be made available. The existing hs20_icon parameter is used to define
the icons and the new operator_icon parameter (zero or more entries) is
used to specify which of the available icons are operator icons. The
operator icons are advertised in the Operator Icon Metadata ANQP-element
while the icon data can be fetched using the same mechanism (icon
request/binary file) that was added for the OSU Providers icons.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends wpa_supplicant Hotspot 2.0 ANQP routines to allow the
Operator Icon Metadata ANQP-element to be fetched with "ANQP_GET <bssid>
hs20:12". The result is available in the new hs20_operator_icon_metadata
entry in the "BSS <bssid>" output.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The Linux 4.9 kernel, at least, can return EEXIST when trying to auth a
station that already exists.
We have seen this bug in multiple places, but it is difficult to
reproduce. Here is a link to someone else that appears to have hit this
issue: https://github.com/greearb/ath10k-ct/issues/18
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
At least LibreSSL v2.7.2 indicates support for OpenSSL API 1.1.0, but it
does not apparently use const ASN1_OBJECT * with X509_ALGOR_get0(). Use
the older non-const version here with LibreSSL to fix compilation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
LibreSSL v2.7 claims an OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER value that would indicate
that SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_3 is available, but that does not seem to be the
case with LibreSSL. As such, skip this step based on whether
SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_3 is defined to avoid build issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
pmksa_cache stubs have not been updated when function prototypes have
been modified in commit 852b2f2738 (SAE: Only allow SAE AKMP for PMKSA
caching attempts). Add new function parameter int akmp to stubs of
pmksa_cache_get() and pmksa_cache_set_current() as well to fix build.
Fixes: 852b2f2738 ("SAE: Only allow SAE AKMP for PMKSA caching attempts")
Signed-off-by: Daniel Golle <daniel@makrotopia.org>
Explicitly check the PMKSA cache entry to have matching SAE AKMP for the
case where determining whether to use PMKSA caching instead of new SAE
authentication. Previously, only the network context was checked, but a
single network configuration profile could be used with both WPA2-PSK
and SAE, so should check the AKMP as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This gives more protection against unexpected behavior if RSN supplicant
code ends up trying to use sm->pmk[] with a stale value. Couple of the
code paths did not clear sm->pmk_len explicitly in cases where the old
PMK is being removed, so cover those cases as well to make sure these
will result in PMK-to-PTK derivation failures rather than use of
incorrect PMK value if such a code path could be reached somehow.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new wifi test config attribute to configure HE LTF in the
driver. This is used for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If there is no explicit wmm_enabled parameter in the configuration
(i.e., conf->wmm_enabled == -1), the configuration reload path needs to
initialize conf->wmm_enabled based on iconf->ieee80211n in
hostapd_reload_bss() similarly to what is done in the initial startup
case in hostapd_setup_bss().
This fixes issues with RSN capabilities being set incorrectly when WMM
is supposed to get enabled and unexpectedly enabling WMM when it is not
supposed to be enabled (HT disabled). Either of these issues could show
up when asking hostapd to reload the configuration file (and when that
file does not set wmm_enabled explicitly).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This ensures a session timeout configured on R0KH either using
RADIUS-based ACL or 802.1X authentication is copied over to the new
R1KH.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
This is needed to allow the remaining session time to be computed for FT
(when sending PMK-R1 to another AP).
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Handle the special case of no PMK-R0 entry in the caller instead of
having to have wpa_ft_rrb_build_r0() aware of the possibility of pmk_r0
being NULL.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
ieee802_11_set_radius_info() might be called with a STA entry that has
already stored identity and/or radius_cui information, so make sure the
old values get freed before being replaced by the new ones.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
This uses set_vlan()/get_vlan() callbacks to fetch and configure the
VLAN of STA. Transmission of VLAN information between APs uses new TLVs.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
IEEE Std 802.11-2016, 12.7.1.7.1 indicates that the lifetime of the
PMK-R0 (and PMK-R1) is bound to the lifetime of PSK or MSK from which
the key was derived. This is currently stored in r0_key_lifetime, but
cache entries are not actually removed.
This commit uses the r0_key_lifetime configuration parameter when
wpa_auth_derive_ptk_ft() is called. This may need to be extended to use
the MSK lifetime, if provided by an external authentication server, with
some future changes. For PSK, there is no such lifetime, but it also
matters less as FT-PSK can be achieved without inter-AP communication.
The expiration timeout is then passed from R0KH to R1KH. The R1KH verifies
that the given timeout for sanity, it may not exceed the locally configured
r1_max_key_lifetime.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
FILS calls wpa_ft_store_pmk_r0() from wpa_auth.c. This is moved into a
new function wpa_ft_store_pmk_fils() in preparation of additional
information being needed.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add a new configuration option ft_r0_key_lifetime that deprecates
r0_key_lifetime. Though, the old configuration is still accepted for
backwards compatibility.
This simplifies testing. All other items are in seconds as well. In
addition, this makes dot11FTR0KeyLifetime comment match with what got
standardized in the end in IEEE Std 802.11r-2008.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
When wpa_supplicant is running on a Linux interface that is configured in
promiscuous mode, and it is not a member of a bridge, incoming EAPOL
packets are processed regardless of the Destination Address in the frame.
As a consequence, there are situations where wpa_supplicant replies to
EAPOL packets that are not destined for it.
This behavior seems undesired (see IEEE Std 802.1X-2010, 11.4.a), and can
be avoided by attaching a BPF filter that lets the kernel discard packets
having pkt_type equal to PACKET_OTHERHOST.
Signed-off-by: Davide Caratti <davide.caratti@gmail.com>
When locating the position of the IGTK PN in the key data, we also need
to skip the KDE header, in addition to the keyid field. This fixes
hostapd RESEND_M3 and RESEND_GROUP_M1 behavior when PMF is negotiated
for the association. Previously, the IGTK KDE ended up getting
practically hidden since zeroing of the PN ended up clearing the KDE OUI
and Type fields.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
In the current implementation, upon an EAP method failure, followed by
an EAP failure, the EAP Status is propagated up in wpa_supplicant with a
general failure parameter string "failure". This parameter is used for a
notification on the dbus.
This commit reports the EAP method failure error code in a separate
callback.
The solution in this commit is generic to all EAP methods, and can be
used by any method that need to pass its error code. However, this
commit only implements the reporting for EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA methods
where the Notification Code (in AT_NOTIFICATION) is used as the method
specific error code value.
Signed-off-by: Ahmed ElArabawy <arabawy@google.com>
When connecting to a WPA-EAP network and the MAC address is changed
just before the association (for example by NetworkManager, which sets
a random MAC during scans), the authentication sometimes fails in the
following way ('####' logs added by me):
wpa_supplicant logs:
wlan0: WPA: RX message 1 of 4-Way Handshake from 02:00:00:00:01:00 (ver=1)
RSN: msg 1/4 key data - hexdump(len=22): dd 14 00 0f ac 04 d8 21 9d a5 73 98 88 26 ef 03 d2 ce f7 04 7d 23
WPA: PMKID in EAPOL-Key - hexdump(len=22): dd 14 00 0f ac 04 d8 21 9d a5 73 98 88 26 ef 03 d2 ce f7 04 7d 23
RSN: PMKID from Authenticator - hexdump(len=16): d8 21 9d a5 73 98 88 26 ef 03 d2 ce f7 04 7d 23
wlan0: RSN: no matching PMKID found
EAPOL: Successfully fetched key (len=32)
WPA: PMK from EAPOL state machines - hexdump(len=32): [REMOVED]
#### WPA: rsn_pmkid():
#### WPA: aa - hexdump(len=6): 02 00 00 00 01 00
#### WPA: spa - hexdump(len=6): 66 20 cf ab 8c dc
#### WPA: PMK - hexdump(len=32): b5 24 76 4f 6f 50 8c f6 a1 2e 24 b8 07 4e 9a 13 1b 94 c4 a8 1f 7e 22 d6 ed fc 7d 43 c7 77 b6 f7
#### WPA: computed PMKID - hexdump(len=16): ea 73 67 b1 8e 5f 18 43 58 24 e8 1c 47 23 87 71
RSN: Replace PMKSA entry for the current AP and any PMKSA cache entry that was based on the old PMK
nl80211: Delete PMKID for 02:00:00:00:01:00
wlan0: RSN: PMKSA cache entry free_cb: 02:00:00:00:01:00 reason=1
RSN: Added PMKSA cache entry for 02:00:00:00:01:00 network_ctx=0x5630bf85a270
nl80211: Add PMKID for 02:00:00:00:01:00
wlan0: RSN: PMKID mismatch - authentication server may have derived different MSK?!
hostapd logs:
WPA: PMK from EAPOL state machine (MSK len=64 PMK len=32)
WPA: 02:00:00:00:00:00 WPA_PTK entering state PTKSTART
wlan1: STA 02:00:00:00:00:00 WPA: sending 1/4 msg of 4-Way Handshake
#### WPA: rsn_pmkid():
#### WPA: aa - hexdump(len=6): 02 00 00 00 01 00
#### WPA: spa - hexdump(len=6): 02 00 00 00 00 00
#### WPA: PMK - hexdump(len=32): b5 24 76 4f 6f 50 8c f6 a1 2e 24 b8 07 4e 9a 13 1b 94 c4 a8 1f 7e 22 d6 ed fc 7d 43 c7 77 b6 f7
#### WPA: computed PMKID - hexdump(len=16): d8 21 9d a5 73 98 88 26 ef 03 d2 ce f7 04 7d 23
WPA: Send EAPOL(version=1 secure=0 mic=0 ack=1 install=0 pairwise=1 kde_len=22 keyidx=0 encr=0)
That's because wpa_supplicant computed the PMKID using the wrong (old)
MAC address used during the scan. wpa_supplicant updates own_addr when
the interface goes up, as the MAC can only change while the interface
is down. However, drivers don't report all interface state changes:
for example the nl80211 driver may ignore a down-up cycle if the down
message is processed later, when the interface is already up. In such
cases, wpa_supplicant (and in particular, the EAP state machine) would
continue to use the old MAC.
Add a new driver event that notifies of MAC address changes while the
interface is active.
Signed-off-by: Beniamino Galvani <bgalvani@redhat.com>
hostap code is used by the Moonshot software (an implementation of the
GSS EAP mechanism - RFC 7055), and those definitions are required but
missing.
Signed-off-by: Alejandro Perez <alex.perez-mendez@jisc.ac.uk>
Add generic DFS offload support using the nl80211 feature that was
recently added to the mac80211-next tree. This uses the already
available DFS offload infrastructure that was previously used with
vendor specific definitions and just sets necessary flags (DFS_OFFLOAD
ext_feature) and forawrds CAC_STARTED event for processing.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Lebed <lebed.dmitry@gmail.com>
The new venue_url parameter can now be used to set the Venue URL ANQP
information instead of having to construct the data and use
anqp_elem=277:<hexdump> to set the raw value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends the original IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016 functionality with the
changes added in REVmd to describe how additional keys are derived to
protect the FT protocol using keys derived through FILS authentication.
This allows key_mgmt=FT-FILS-SHA256 to be used with FT protocol since
the FTE MIC can now be calculated following the changes in REVmd. The
FT-FILS-SHA384 case is still unsupported (it needs support for variable
length MIC field in FTE).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Derive PMK-R1 locally if the derived PMKR1Name is not found from the
local cache, but the request is for a key that was originally generated
locally (R0KH-ID matches) and the PMKR0Name is found in the local cache.
This was apparently not hit in the previously used FT sequences, but
this is useful to have available if a PMK-R1 entry is dropped from the
local cache before PMK-R0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the requested key is not available locally, there is no point in
trying to send a pull request back to self for the key.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous implementation ended up defaulting to using PRF-SHA1 for
deriving PTK from PMK when SAE was used. This is not correct since the
SAE AKM is defined to be using SHA-256 -based KDF instead. Fix that.
Note: This change is not backwards compatible. Both the AP and station
side implementations will need to be updated at the same time to
maintain functionality.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, the association that used SAE authentication ended up
recalculating the PMKID for EAPOL-Key msg 1/4 using incorrect
PMK-to-PMKID derivation instead of using the previously derived PMKID
from SAE. The correct PMKID was used only when going through PMKSA
caching exchange with a previously derived PMKSA from SAE.
Fix this by storing the SAE PMKID into the state machine entry for the
initial SAE authentication case when there is no explicit PMKSA entry
attached to the station.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, matching PMKSA cache entry ended up clearing XXKey. However,
that XXKey is needed in the specific case where FT-SAE goes through the
initial mobility domain association with SAE authentication. FT-SAE
worked previously since the hostapd side generation of the particular
PMKID value in msg 1/4 was broken, but once that PMKID is fixed,
wpa_supplicant will need this fix to allow FT-SAE to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When processing 20/40 BSS Coexistence Management frames that do not
explicitly require 40 MHz to be disabled, check whether the reported
channels in 20/40 BSS Intolerant Channel Report element match the
current primary channel. If so, allow 40 MHz operation to continue. This
makes the during-operation updates for 20/40 Operation Permitted more
consistent with the scans during initial BSS startup.
The received 20/40 BSS Intolerant Channel Report channels are to be used
in the OT set in the during-operation determination and the P == OT_i
exception was ignored in the previous implementation which could result
in the AP first starting with 40 MHz and then dropping to 20 MHz on
first received 20/40 BSS Coexistence Management frame even though there
was no change in the neighboring BSSs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends 20/40 BSS Coexistence Management frame processing to
iterate over all the included 20/40 BSS Intolerant Channel Report
elements instead of using only the first one.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The 20 MHz BSS Width Request field is set to 1 only for intra-BSS
reports. As such, ignore the frame if such a claim is made by a
transmitter that is not currently associated with the AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to understand what kind of information a STA is
reporting about 20/40 MHz coexistence requirements.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Ignore hostapd_event_sta_low_ack for a station which has agreed to
steering by checking the agreed_to_steer flag. This flag will be set
whenever a station accepts the BSS transition request from the AP.
Without this ignoring of the LOW_ACK event, the steering in-progress
might be affected due to disassociation. In this way AP will allow some
time (two seconds) for the station to move away and reset the flag after
the timeout.
Co-Developed-by: Tamizh Chelvam <tamizhr@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Tamizh chelvam <tamizhr@codeaurora.org>
Add an event callback for EVENT_STATION_OPMODE_CHANGED to allow
user/application to get the notification whenever there is a change in a
station's HT/VHT op mode.
The new events:
STA-OPMODE-MAX-BW-CHANGED <addr> <20(no-HT)|20|40|80|80+80|160>
STA-OPMODE-SMPS-MODE-CHANGED <addr> <automatic|off|dynamic|static>
STA-OPMODE-N_SS-CHANGED <addr> <N_SS>
Signed-off-by: Tamizh chelvam <tamizhr@codeaurora.org>
The nl80211 driver can report STA_OPMODE notification event as soon as
it receives an HT/VHT Action frame about modification of station's SMPS
mode/bandwidth/RX NSS. Add support to parse such events.
Signed-off-by: Tamizh chelvam <tamizhr@codeaurora.org>
This allows external application to get last ACK signal strength of the
last transmitted frame if the driver makes this information
(NL80211_STA_INFO_ACK_SIGNAL) available.
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Venkateswara Naralasetty <vnaralas@codeaurora.org>
Check wpa_auth_write_assoc_resp_owe() return value to keep static
analyzers happier. The code path where this could happen is not really
reachable due to the separate hapd->conf->own_ie_override check and
wpa_auth_write_assoc_resp_owe() returning NULL only in an error case in
the override path. Furthermore, clean up the pointer return value to use
a proper pointer (NULL vs. 0).
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
To retain configurator information across hostapd/wpa_supplicant
restart, private key need to be maintained to generate a valid pair of
authentication keys (connector, netaccess_key, csign) for new enrollees
in the network.
Add a DPP_CONFIGURATOR_GET_KEY control interface API through which the
private key of an existing configurator can be fetched.
Command format:
DPP_CONFIGURATOR_GET_KEY <configurator_id>
The output from this command can then be used with
"DPP_CONFIGURATOR_ADD key=<hexdump>" to create the same key again.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The SAE AKM 00-0F-AC:8 is supposed to use EAPOL-Key Key Descriptor
Version 0 (AKM-defined) with AES-128-CMAC and NIST AES Key Wrap.
However, the previous implementation ended up using Key Descriptor
Version 2 (HMAC-SHA-1-128 and NIST AES Key Wrap). Fix this by using the
appropriate Key Descriptor Version and integrity algorithm. Use helper
functions to keep the selection clearer and more consistent between
wpa_supplicant and hostapd uses.
Note: This change is not backwards compatible. Both the AP and station
side implementations will need to be updated at the same time to
maintain functionality.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends dpp_test functionality to allow DPP exchanges to be stopped
after authentication is completed on the Initiator, i.e., after sending
out the Authentication Confirm message. Previously, dpp_test=89 was used
only on the Responder side to stop after receiving the Authentication
Confirm message. The main use case for this extended functionality is to
be able to stop the protocol exchange on a device that acts as
authentication Initiator and Enrollee.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
enum wpa_alg was being compared with WPA_CIPHER_* values. That does not
work here and strict compilers will report this as an error. Fix the
comparision to use proper WPA_ALG_* values. This fixes testing
capability for resetting IPN for BIP.
Fixes: 16579769ff ("Add testing functionality for resetting PN/IPN for configured keys")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These structures are not modified or freed (i.e., only data from them is
copied), so mark the arguments const to document this a bit more clearly
now that there was a memory leak in one of the callers to this function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Log newly generated SAKs as well as unwrapped SAKs with wpa_hexdump_key()
rather than wpa_hexdump(). By default, the wpa_hexdump_key() function
will not display sensitive key data.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
In the unlikely event the local KaY and the elected peer have the same
actor priority as well as the same MAC address, log a warning message
and do not elect a key server. Resolution is for network administrator
to reconfigure MAC address.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
When the number of live peers becomes 0 the KaY was setting
kay->authenticated true and telling the CP to connect AUTHENTICATED.
Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010 Clause 12.2, MKA.authenticated means "the Key
Server has proved mutual authentication but has determined that
Controlled Port communication should proceed without the use of MACsec",
which means port traffic will be passed in the clear.
When the number of live peers becomes 0 the KaY must instead set
kay->authenticated false and tell the CP to connect PENDING. Per Clause
12.3 connect PENDING will "prevent connectivity by clearing the
controlledPortEnabled parameter."
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Upon receipt of the "MACsec MKPDU SAK Use parameter set" the KaY verifies
that both the latest key and the old key are valid. If the local system
reboots or is reinitialized, the KaY won't have a copy of its old key.
Therefore if the KaY does not have a copy of its old key it should not
reject MKPDUs that contain old key data in the MACsec SAK Use parameter.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
KaY looks up participants using CAK Name (CKN). Per IEEE Std 802.1X-2010
Clause 9.3.1 CAK identification, the CKN is an integral number of
octets, between 1 and 32 (inclusive). This fix will ensure that the KaY
does not inadvertently match CKNs such as 'myCakNamedFoo' and
'myCakNamedFooBar'.
Signed-off-by: Michael Siedzik <msiedzik@extremenetworks.com>
Extend ACL check to deny Probe Request frames for the client which does
not pass ACL check. Skip this check for the case where RADIUS ACL is
used to avoid excessive load on the RADIUS authentication server due to
Probe Request frames. This patch add wpa_msg event for auth and assoc
rejection due to acl reject.
Signed-off-by: Tamizh chelvam <tamizhr@codeaurora.org>
Define a new WiFi test configuration attributes in QCA vendor
command to configure BA session parameters and to add or
delete a BA session and to configure no ack policy.
This is used for configuring the testbed device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define a new WiFi test configuration attribute in QCA vendor
command to allow or not to allow WEP/TKIP in HT/VHT/HE mode.
This is used for configuring the testbed device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
For FILS, __wpa_send_eapol() is called only with the kde != NULL, but a
static analyzer might not understand that. Add an explicit check kde !=
NULL similarly to the other cases going through the kde parameter to
silence such bogus warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jeffin Mammen <jmammen@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to understand why "SAE: Failed to select group"
debug entry shows up in cases the selected crypto library does not
support a specific group.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit e61fea6b46 ('SAE: Fix PMKSA caching
behavior in AP mode') modified the PSK fetching loop to not override PMK
in case of SAE with PMKSA caching. However, that commit missed the error
path cases where there is need to break from the loop with exact
negative of the check in the beginning of the loop. This could result in
hitting an infinite loop in hostapd if a station derived a different PMK
value from otherwise successfully completed SAE authentication or if a
STA used a different PMK with a PMKSA caching attempt after a previously
completed successful authentication.
Fix this by adding the matching break condition on SAE AKM within the
loops.
Fixes: e61fea6b46 ("SAE: Fix PMKSA caching behavior in AP mode")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This commit takes care of the sigalg configuration using the relatively
recent SSL_CTX_set_verify_algorithm_prefs() addition from April 2017 to
address the functionality that was already there with OpenSSL using
SSL_set1_sigalgs_list().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
BoringSSL removed the special OpenSSL cipher suite value "SUITEB192", so
need to map that to the explicit ciphersuite
(ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384), curve (P-384), and sigalg
(SSL_SIGN_ECDSA_SECP384R1_SHA384) to allow 192-bit level Suite B with
ECDSA to be used.
This commit takes care of the sigalg configuration using the relatively
recent SSL_CTX_set_verify_algorithm_prefs() addition from April 2017.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
BoringSSL removed the special OpenSSL cipher suite value "SUITEB192", so
need to map that to the explicit ciphersuite
(ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384), curve (P-384), and sigalg
(SSL_SIGN_ECDSA_SECP384R1_SHA384) to allow 192-bit level Suite B with
ECDSA to be used.
This commit takes care of the ciphersuite and curve configuration.
sigalg change is in a separate commit since it requires a newer
BoringSSL API function that may not be available in all builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
In practice, this does the same thing (i.e., allows only the P-384 curve
to be used), but using an older API function that happens to be
available in some BoringSSL builds while the newer one is not.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
India supports 5 GHz channels 169 and 173 now. Enable HT40 across
channels 165 and 169. Leave channel 173 to remain HT20 only.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Now we can configure the network block so that it allows MFP setting for
the NL80211_CMD_CONNECT command. If the kernel finds an AP that requires
MFP, it'll be able to connect to it.
Note that since NL80211_MFP_OPTIONAL isn't supported for
NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, we need to take the MFP configuration outside
nl80211_connect_common(). In addition, check that
NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_MFP_OPTIONAL is supported, to be backward compatible
with older kernels.
Signed-off-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com>
Indicate that the connection is authorized when receiving a port
authorized event from the driver.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
Add an event that indicates that the 4 way handshake was completed by
the driver.
This event is useful for networks that require 802.1X authentication.
The driver can use this event that a new connection is already
authorized (e.g. when the driver used PMKSA caching) and 802.1X
authentication is not required.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
Add support for setting the PMK to the driver. This is used for
drivers that support 4-way handshake offload.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
Set the WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_4WAY_HANDSHAKE flag if the driver indicates
both 4-way handshake PSK and 802.1X support. Currently wpa_supplicant
doesn't distinguish between 4-way handshake for 802.1X and PSK, but
nl80211 API has different capabilities for each one.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Enhance QCA vendor specific APF interface to support write/read program
and/or data and to enable/disable APF feature.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
TLS v1.3 needs to be explicitly disabled to allow cipher suite selection
for EAP-FAST to work with OpenSSL builds that include TLS v1.3 support.
Without this, OpenSSL refuses to generate ClientHello due to the cipher
suite list including only ciphers allowed with older versions than TLS
v1.3.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The current cfg80211 limit for the maximum NL80211_ATTR_PMK length is
48, so anything larger than that will result in the operation completely
failing. Since the PMKSA entries can be used without the PMK for most
purposes (the main use case for PMK currently is offloaded FILS
authentication), try to go ahead by configuring only the PMKID for the
case where 64-octet PMK is needed (which is currently limited to only
DPP with NIST P-521 and brainpoolP512r1 curves). This can fix DPP
connections with drivers that expect to get the PMKID through this
interface while still leaving the actual 4-way handshake for user space.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to notice if the driver operation to manage PMKSA
cache information fails unexpectedly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Check for the fi parameter to be non-NULL before trying to fetch the
ssi_signal information similarly to how the fi->freq was already
handled. While the meta information is supposed to be available, it
looks like there is at least one corner case where fi == NULL could be
used (Authentication frame reprocessing after RADIUS-based ACL).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reject SAE association request when PMKID is included in the RSNE, but
the corresponding PMKSA is not available in the AP.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
Define a new QCA vendor sub command for configuring the device with wifi
test configuration. Add new test config attributes for this sub command
that are used to configure the device for testbed configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This function is used to process a (Re)Association Request frame, so
rename it appropriately to mention assoc_req instead of auth_req.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
Verify that the STA has ECDH data available before trying to use this
data to add the OWE DH Params element.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
This was already the case with the hostapd-based SME/MLME
implementation, but the OWE DH Param element construction for the
driver-based SME/MLME needed a matching change to set the group
properly.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
For FT-PSK sm->xxkey was populated with only the first password on the
linked list (i.e., last matching password in the wpa_psk_file) in
INITPSK. This caused only that password to be recognized and accepted.
All other passwords were not verified properly and subsequently
prevented clients from connecting.
Hostapd would report:
Jan 30 12:55:44 hostapd: ap0: STA xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx WPA: sending 1/4 msg of 4-Way Handshake
Jan 30 12:55:44 hostapd: ap0: STA xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx WPA: received EAPOL-Key frame (2/4 Pairwise)
Jan 30 12:55:44 hostapd: ap0: STA xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx WPA: invalid MIC in msg 2/4 of 4-Way Handshake
Jan 30 12:55:45 hostapd: ap0: STA xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx WPA: EAPOL-Key timeout
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal@plumewifi.com>
The blocking timeout of this function was changed from 2 seconds to 10
seconds in this commit 1480633f ("Use longer timeout in
wpa_ctrl_request()"), but the description was never changed accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Simon Dinkin <simon.dinkin@tandemg.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Use the preprocessor conditional "ifdef" instead of "if" before
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS to prevent an issue on build systems that treat
undefined preprocessor identifiers as an error.
Signed-off-by: David Messer <david.messer@garmin.com>
This netlink socket handle owns the connect request and is further used
by the host driver/kernel to request for the external authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This command/event interface can be used by host drivers that do not
define separate commands for authentication and association but rely on
wpa_supplicant for the authentication (SAE) processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new QCA vendor commands and attributes to get thermal information
and send thermal shutdown related commands. Indicates the driver to
enter the power saving mode or resume from the power saving mode based
on the given temperature and thresholds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If a matching PMKSA cache entry is present for an OWE client, use it and
do not go through DH while processing Association Rquest frame.
Association Response frame will identify the PMKID in such a case and DH
parameters won't be present.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
Handle OWE unsupported finite cyclic group in (Re)Association Request
frame when not using the hostapd SME/MLME.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
Add additional NDP attributes and NDP subcommand value which is
provided as part of schedule update indication from driver/firmware
to HAL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Send Public Action frames with wildcard BSSID when destination was
broadcast address. This is required for DPP PKEX where the recipients
may drop the frames received with different BSSID than the wildcard
address or the current BSSID.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@codeaurora.org>
The y coordinates for some of these PKEX role-specific points were
changed in the PKEX specification, so update the implementation to
match.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allow MSDU queue depth threshold in target to be set per peer per
TID. This command contains MAC address, TID, update mask, and threshold
values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
FILS capability bit setting could have ended up setting boths biths 72
(correct) and 64 (incorrect; part of Max Number of MSDUs In A-MSDU). Fix
this by adding the missing break to the switch statement.
Fixed: f55acd909e ("FILS: Set FILS Capability bit in management frames from AP")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows a separate configuration parameter (imsi_identity) to be
used in EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' profiles to override the identity used in MK
derivation for the case where the identity is expected to be from the
last AT_IDENTITY attribute (or EAP-Response/Identity if AT_IDENTITY was
not used). This may be needed to avoid sending out an unprotected
permanent identity information over-the-air and if the EAP-SIM/AKA
server ends up using a value based on the real IMSI during the internal
key derivation operation (that does not expose the data to others).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This prevents an issue where duplicated Authentication Response frame
could have resulted in deriving a new ke value after M.x had already
been cleared. This would result in the following configuration exchange
failing. This could happen since many driver do not filter out
retransmitted Public Action frames and link layer. Furthermore, this
could have been used as a denial-of-service attack agains the DPP
exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This commit extends the existing QCA vendor specific NUD_STATS_GET/SET
interface to also collect the statistics of the data packets. The
intention here is to get more comprehensive information to detect the
network unreachability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes hostapd use the WLAN-Reason-Code value from Access-Reject
when disconnecting a station due to IEEE 802.1X authentication failure.
If the RADIUS server does not include this attribute, the default value
23 (IEEE 802.1X authentication failed) is used. That value was the
previously hardcoded reason code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make the RADIUS server in hostapd add WLAN-Reason-Code attribute to all
Access-Reject messages generated based on EAP-Failure from the EAP
server. For now, the reason code value is set to 23 (IEEE 802.1X
authentication failed). This can be extending in future commits to cover
addition failure reasons.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use "cipher out of policy" value instead of invalid group cipher (which
is for the group data frame cipher) and management frame policy
violation (which is used for MFPC/MFPR mismatch).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This commit introduces a QCA vendor command that provides the current
information of WLAN hardware MAC and its associated WLAN netdev
interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd with previoiusly implemented wpa_supplicant
functionality to retry DPP Authentication Request/Response and to
iterate over possible negotiation channels.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Not all code paths for management frame RX reporting delivered the
correct frequency for offchannel RX cases. This is needed mainly for
Public Action frame processing in some special cases where AP is
operating, but an exchange is done on a non-operational channel. For
example, DPP Initiator role may need to do this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
GnuTLS-based builds can now be done using either libnettle or libgcrypt
for crypto functionality:
CONFIG_TLS=gnutls
CONFIG_CRYPTO=nettle
CONFIG_TLS=gnutls
CONFIG_CRYPTO=gnutls
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows OpenSSL-style configuration of Suite B parameters to be used
in the wpa_supplicant network profile. 128-bit and 192-bit level
requirements for ECDHE-ECDSA cases are supported. RSA >=3K case is
enforced using GnuTLS %PROFILE_HIGH special priority string keyword.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends GnuTLS support for tls_disable_v1_{0,1,2}=1 flags in the
phase1 network profile parameter in wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Indicate more clearly when the parsing succeeds to avoid ending the
debug prints with various internal GnuTLS internal error messages even
when the parsing actually succeeded in the end.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace the internal HMAC MD5, SHA-1, and SHA256 implementations with
the ones from libgcrypt and also add the SHA384 and SHA512 versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace the internal SHA256 implementation with the one from libgcrypt
and also add the SHA384 and SHA512 versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a shared helper function instead of implementing practically same
sequence separately for each hash function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The test against use of TKIP was done only in MFP-required
(ieee80211w=2) configuration. Fix this to check the pairwise cipher for
MFP-enabled (ieee80211w=1) case as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd.conf parameter sae_require_pmf=<0/1> can now be used to
enforce negotiation of MFP for all associations that negotiate use of
SAE. This is used in cases where SAE-capable devices are known to be
MFP-capable and the BSS is configured with optional MFP (ieee80211w=1)
for legacy support. The non-SAE stations can connect without MFP while
SAE stations are required to negotiate MFP if sae_require_mfp=1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Set Sc to 2^16-1 when moving to Accepted state per IEEE Std 802.11-2016,
12.4.8.6.5 (Protocol instance behavior - Confirmed state). This allows
the peer in Accepted state to silently ignore unnecessary
retransmissions of the Confirm message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This implements the behavior described in IEEE Std 802.11-2016,
12.4.8.6.6 (Protocol instance behavior - Accepted state) to silently
discard received Confirm message in the Accepted state if the new
message does not use an incremented send-confirm value or if the special
2^16-1 value is used. This avoids unnecessary processing of
retransmitted Confirm messages.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd.conf parameter sae_sync (default: 5) can now be used to
configure the dot11RSNASAESync value to specify the maximum number of
synchronization errors that are allowed to happen prior to
disassociation of the offending SAE peer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The patch offers alternate implementations of some functions using the
abstract cryptographic API.
This work was done in preparation for the changes to allow hostap to be
compiled with the wolfSSL cryptography and TLS library.
Signed-off-by: Sean Parkinson <sean@wolfssl.com>
This implements crypto_dh_init() and crypto_dh_derive_secret() using
os_get_random() and crypto_mod_exp() for all crypto_*.c wrappers that
include crypto_mod_exp() implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A new vendor attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_GET_WEIGHED_PCL is added for
getting preferred channels with weight value and a flag to indicate how
the channels should be used in P2P negotiation process.
Signed-off-by: Peng Xu <pxu@qti.qualcomm.com>
Indicates the driver to use the RSNE as-is from the connect interface.
Exclusively used for the scenarios where the device is used as a testbed
device with special functionality and not recommended for production.
This helps driver to not validate the RSNE passed from user space and
thus allow arbitrary IE data to be used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously commit c79238b6a4 ('Define a
QCA vendor command to configure SAR Power limits') implemented a vendor
command interface to allow a userspace entity to dynamically control the
SAR power limits. Now implement a command to retrieve the current SAR
power limits.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new disable_fils parameter can be used to disable FILS functionality
in the driver. This is currently removing the FILS Capability bit in
Extended Capabilities and providing a callback to the driver wrappers.
driver_nl80211.c implements this using a QCA vendor specific command for
now.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows external programs to get the average channel utilization.
The average channel utilization is calculated and reported through
STATUS command. Users need to configure chan_util_avg_period and
bss_load_update_period in hostapd config to get the average channel
utilization.
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@qti.qualcomm.com>
Recalculate the timeout value for each event instead of calculating this
once and then not allowing the timeout configuration to be changed
without fully stopping and restarting the interface.
This allows the bss_load_update_period configuration parameter to be
modified while a BSS continues operating.
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@qti.qualcomm.com>
Do not update the configuration parameter before having verified the
value to be in the valid range.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
owe_auth_req_process() can return NULL in error cases, but the caller
was not prepared for this. The p pointer cannot be overridden in such
cases since that would result in buffer length (p - buf) overflows. Fix
this by using a temporary variable to check the return value before
overriding p so that the hostapd_sta_assoc() ends up using correct
length for the IE buffer.
Fixes: 33c8bbd8ca ("OWE: Add AP mode handling of OWE with drivers that implement SME")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The BoringSSL version of crypto_ecdh_init() and dpp_gen_keypair() works
fine with OpenSSL as well, so use that same implementation for both to
avoid unnecessary maintanence of multiple versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to go through EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name(),
EC_KEY_new(), and EC_KEY_set_group() when a single call to
EC_KEY_new_by_curve_name() takes care of all that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 5548453a2d since
BoringSSL added ECDSA_SIG_set0() and ECDSA_SIG_get0() in commit
8dc226ca8f1ef60737e1c1bf8cfcabf51d4068c7 ('Add some missing OpenSSL
1.1.0 accessors.') and updated X509_ALGOR_get0() prototype to match
OpenSSL 1.1.0 changes in commit e3b2a5d30d309091cab3e6a19dee7323c40d968d
('Const-correct X509_ALGOR_get0.').
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows wpa_supplicant configuration with phase1="tls_suiteb=1" to
use openssl_ciphers="ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384" to further limit the
possible TLS cipher suites when using Suite B with RSA >3K keys. This
combination disables use of DHE and as such, mandates ECDHE to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These functions are a bit awkward to use for one-off file loads, as
suggested by the tls_clear_default_passwd_cb() logic. There was also
some historical mess with OpenSSL versions and either not having per-SSL
settings, having per-SSL settings but ignoring them, and requiring the
per-SSL settings.
Instead, loading the key with the lower-level functions seems a bit
tidier and also allows abstracting away trying both formats, one after
another.
Signed-off-by: David Benjamin <davidben@google.com>
There's no need to make an extra copy of private_key_passwd for
SSL_{CTX_,}set_default_passwd_cb().
Signed-off-by: David Benjamin <davidben@google.com>
A new vendor attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_LATENCY_LEVEL is added
for vendor sub-command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SET_WIFI_CONFIGURATION.
This attribute is for setting the level of WLM.
Signed-off-by: Paul Zhang <paulz@qti.qualcomm.com>
This is needed to allow a credential to be built for GCMP-256/CCMP-256
networks that do not enable GCMP-128/CCMP-128.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the check against WPA/TKIP only configuration by adding CCMP-256
and GCMP-256 to the list of allowed ciphers. This is needed to allow WPS
to be enabled in AP configurations where neither CCMP-128 nor GCMP-128
are enabled.
Signed-off-by: Shiva Sankar Gajula <sgajula@qti.qualcomm.com>
DPP Responder selects whether mutual authentication is used. This commit
adds information about that selection to upper layers (ctrl_iface event
DPP-AUTH-DIRECTION mutual=<0/1>) on the Initiator side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends dpp_test functionality to allow DPP exchanges to be stopped
when receiving a specified message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This nl80211 attribute uses NLA_U8 policy in cfg80211 and wpa_supplicant
needs to use same size when writing the attribute.
This fixes mesh mode regression triggered by kernel commit "net:
netlink: Update attr validation to require exact length for some types"
in v4.15-rc1 that resulted in the following debug log entry when trying
to join a mesh:
nl80211: mesh join failed: ret=-22 (Invalid argument)
Fixes: 6c1664f605 ("nl80211: Add new commands to support mesh interfaces")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This nl80211 attribute uses NLA_U8 policy in cfg80211 and
hostapd/wpa_supplicant needs to use same size when writing the
attribute.
This fixes AP mode regression triggered by kernel commit "net: netlink:
Update attr validation to require exact length for some types" in
v4.15-rc1 that resulted in the following debug log entry when trying to
enable beaconing:
nl80211: Beacon set failed: -34 (Numerical result out of range)
Fixes: da1080d721 ("nl80211: Advertise and configure SMPS modes")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add QCA vendor command and attributes for vendor specific Representative
RF Operating Parameter (RROP) information. This information is intended
for optional use by external ACS. It provides guidance values for some
RF parameters that are used by the system during operation, so that
external ACS can utilize these to compare between channels, bands, etc.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
One of the event message for TX status was missing 'x' from the "0x"
prefix. Add that to make the used format consistent for all cookie debug
print cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
sha256_vector() result was ignored apart from printing out the failure
in the debug log. This is not really a normal case and it is better to
reject the full operation rather than try to continue with an incorrect
public key hash value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the second json_alloc_token() call failed to allocate memory,
json_parse() missed the first allocation on the error path. Assign the
root pointer earlier for that case to avoid the potential memory leak.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously this stopped only the DPP Authentication instance, but it is
better to clear both PKEX and Authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_supplicant was already doing this and hostapd needs to clear
hapd->dpp_auth when completing the exchange in Configurator (GAS server)
role.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
An additional TX status callback could result in processing the DPP
authentication completion another time at least with hostapd. Fix this
by clearing the dpp_auth_ok_on_ack when processing it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for a timeout from an old GAS server operation to
trigger DPP configuration failure during the subsequent DPP operation.
Fix this by verifying that the status callback is for the response
generated during the same DPP Authentication/Configuration exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Configurator signing its own Connector was previously supported only in
wpa_supplicant. This commit extends that to hostapd to allow an AP
acting as a Configurator to self-configure itself.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This moves the Configurator and Bootstrapping Information data from
struct hostapd_data (per-BSS) to struct hapd_interfaces (per-hostapd
process). This allows the information to be maintained over interface
restarts and shared between interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of using the all-zeros Initiator Bootstrapping Key Hash when no
local bootstrapping key is configuref for the Initiator, automatically
generate a temporary bootstrapping key for the same curve that the
Responder uses. If the Responder indicates that it wants to do mutual
authentication, provide the URI for the auto-generated bootstrapping key
in the DPP-RESPONSE-PENDING event for upper layers to display the QR
Code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Avoid same interface processing nl80211 events when at least one of
IFIDX, WDEV, or WIPHY index attribute is available in the nl80211 event
message.
Previously, a same interface processes events when ifidx and wdev id
attribute were not available in the nl80211 message. This is extended to
check the presence of wiphy index attribute as well since some radar
notifications include only WIPHY index attrbute in the nl80211 message.
Signed-off-by: Sriram R <srirrama@qti.qualcomm.com>
These allow external programs to determine supported legacy, HT, and VHT
rates of an interface or a STA.
Signed-off-by: Bhagavathi Perumal S <bperumal@qti.qualcomm.com>
If fils_decrypt_assoc() were to fail on the AP side, the previous
implementation could have continued through the response generation
using left = -1. That could have resulted in unexpected processing if
this value were to be used as the length of the remaining (unencrypted)
IEs. Fix this by not updating left in the failure case.
Fixes: 78815f3dde ("FILS: Decrypt Association Request elements and check Key-Auth (AP)")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Verify that nothing unexpected happened with EAPOL-Key Key MIC
calculation when transmitting EAPOL-Key frames from the Authenticator.
This should not be able to happen in practice, but if if it does, there
is no point in sending out the frame without the correct Key MIC value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 03abb6b541 ('DPP: Reject unexpected
Req/Resp message based on Auth/PKEX role') used incorrect type of error
value (NULL vs. -1). Fix that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
With the AP proto configured being WPA/RSN and SME in the
driver, the previous implementation in hostapd is to not
process hostapd_notif_assoc() due to "No WPA/RSN IE from STA",
if the (Re)Association Request frame is without the WPA/RSN IEs.
Enhance that to disassociate such station provided the AP is not using
WPS.
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
This allows external applications to get event indication for Probe
Request frames. Extend ctrl iface cmd "ATTACH" to enable this event on
per-request basis. For example, user has to send ctrl iface cmd "ATTACH
probe_rx_events=1" to enable the Probe Request frame events.
Signed-off-by: bhagavathi perumal s <bperumal@qti.qualcomm.com>
If unicast Authentication Request frame is used and the peer ACKs such a
frame, but does not reply within the two second limit, there is no need
to continue trying to retransmit the request frames since the peer was
found, but not responsive.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new conf={sta,ap}-{sae,psk-sae} parameter values can now be used to
specify that the legacy configuration object is for SAE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows DPP to be used for enrolling credentials for SAE networks in
addition to the legacy PSK (WPA-PSK) case. In addition, enable FT-PSK
and FT-SAE cases automatically.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Retransmit the PKEX Exchange Request frame if no response from a peer is
received. This makes the exchange more robust since this frame is sent
to a broadcast address and has no link layer retries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend dpp_test to allow more invalid attribute values to be written
into Peer Discovery Request/Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend dpp_test to cover a case where Config Attrib Object value is
invalid in Configuration Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend dpp_test to cover cases where DPP Status value is invalid in
Authentication Response/Confirm frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend dpp_test to cover cases where Initiator/Responder Bootstrap Key
Hash value in DPP Authentication frames is invalid (flip one bit).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends dpp_test to allow invalid Initiator/Responder Protocol Key
to be written into the Authentication Request/Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the build include SHA384, use that to derive GTK from GMK. In
addition, add more random bytes bytes to the PRF-X() context data for
longer GTK to reduce dependency on the randomness of the GMK.
GMK is 256 bits of random data and it was used with SHA256, so the
previous design was likely sufficient for all needs even with 128 bits
of additional randomness in GTK derivation. Anyway, adding up to 256
bits of new randomness and using SHA384 can be helpful extra protection
particularly for the cases using GCMP-256 or CCMP-256 as the group
cipher.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Unlike OpenSSL, BoringSSL returns an error from
EC_POINT_set_affine_coordinates_GFp() is not on the curve. As such, need
to behave differently here depending on which library is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the OpenSSL version of i2d_EC_PUBKEY() seemed to be able to use
the POINT_CONVERSION_COMPRESSED setting on the EC key, that did not seem
to work with BoringSSL. Since this is not exactly robust design, replace
use of i2d_EC_PUBKEY() with a custom routine that enforces the DPP rules
on SubjectPublicKeyInfo (compressed format of the public key,
ecPublicKey OID, parameters present and indicating the curve by OID).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This routine was previously implemented twice using i2d_EC_PUBKEY().
There is no need to duplicate that implementation and especially since
it looks like this implementation needs to be replaced for BoringSSL,
start by using a shared helper function for both locations so that there
is only a single place that uses i2d_EC_PUBKEY() to build the special
DPP bootstrapping key DER encoding.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
BoringSSL restored the previously removed AES-192 ECB support in ("Add
AES-192 ECB.") commit. Since this is needed for DPP with the P-384
curve, restore support for this through EVP_aes_192_ecb().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it clearer why some AES operations fail especially with
BoringSSL where the 192-bit case is not supported.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL claims to have OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER for a
1.1.0 version, but it does not provide ECDSA_SIG_set0() or
ECDSA_SIG_get0(). For now, add the helper functions regardless of the
version BoringSSL claims to be. Similarly, include the X509_ALGOR_get0()
workaround unconditionally for BoringSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
BoringSSL does not provide some of the OpenSSL API that was used here,
so update this to use similar design to what was already done with DPP
key derivation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL claims to have OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER for a
1.1.0 version, but it does not provide SSL_set_default_passwd_cb*(). For
now, comment out this regardless of the version BoringSSL claims to be.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL claims to have OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER for a
1.1.0 version, but it does not provide SSL_set1_sigalgs_list(). For now,
comment out this regardless of the version BoringSSL claims to be.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL claims to have OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER for a
1.1.0 version, but it does not provide RSA_bits(). For now, add this
backwards compatibility wrapper for BoringSSL regardless of the version
it claims to be.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new hostapd configuration parameter group_cipher can now be used to
override the automatic cipher selection based on enabled pairwise
ciphers. It should be noted that selecting an unexpected group cipher
can result in interoperability issues and this new capability is mainly
for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Fix the block comment style issue introduced as part of commit
fbfceef3af ("Add QCA vendor commands for
spectral scan").
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add sub-command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_PEER_FLUSH_PENDING to flush
pending packets in firmware. The attributes are listed in enum
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_flush_pending. The QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_PEER_ADDR
specifies the peer MAC address and the QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_AC specifies
the access category of the pending packets.
Signed-off-by: Lin Tingting <tinlin@qti.qualcomm.com>
A new vendor attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_WMM_AC_PENDING_MSDU
is added for vendor sub-command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_LL_STATS_GET.
This attribute is for pending MSDUs corresponding to respective AC.
Signed-off-by: Zhang Qian <zhangq@qti.qualcomm.com>
This adds support for SAE in AP mode with the atheros driver interface.
EVENT_RX_MGMT includes SAE processing while EVENT_AUTH would require
more changes to make this work.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Undefine the __bitwise macro before defining it to avoid conflicts
with the one from linux/types.h; the same is done some lines above
when __CHECKER__ is defined. Fixes the following warning:
In file included from ../src/l2_packet/l2_packet_linux.c:15:0:
hostap/src/utils/common.h:438:0: warning: "__bitwise" redefined
#define __bitwise
In file included from /usr/include/linux/filter.h:9:0,
from ../src/l2_packet/l2_packet_linux.c:13:
/usr/include/linux/types.h:21:0: note: this is the location of the previous definition
#define __bitwise __bitwise__
Signed-off-by: Beniamino Galvani <bgalvani@redhat.com>
../src/common/dpp.c: In function 'dpp_test_gen_invalid_key':
../src/common/dpp.c:5531:10: warning: return makes integer from pointer without a cast [-Wint-conversion]
return NULL;
^
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
There should be no wpa_pmk_to_ptk() calls with the cipher argument
indicating a cipher that is not allowed as a pairwise cipher. However,
it looks like that was possible to happen with wlantest. Check for this
corner case explicitly to avoid generating confusing debug logs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is for protocol testing to check what happens if the Responser
receives an unexpected Authentication Response instead of Authentication
Confirm.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This prevents issues where an unexpected message in the DPP
Authentication exchange or PKEX could result in undefined behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends wpa_supplicant DPP implementation to retransmit DPP
Authentication Response frame every 10 seconds up to 5 times if the peer
does not reply with DPP Authentication Confirm frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, this command stopped listen operation immediately, but if
there was an ongoing authentication exchange, a new listen operation was
started. This is not really expected behavior, so stop the
authentication exchange first with this command to avoid restarting
listen operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new role=either parameter can now be used with DPP_AUTH_INIT to
indicate that the initiator can take either the Configurator or Enrollee
role.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends wpa_supplicant to iterate over all available channels from
the intersection of what the peer indicates and the local device
supports when initiating DPP Authentication. In addition, retry DPP
Authentication Request frame up to five times if no response is
received.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is an initial step in allowing non-operating channel operations
with DPP when hostapd is the Responder. For now, this is only used for
specifying role=configurator/enrollee and qr=mutual cases similarly to
the wpa_supplicant configuration for in Responder role. Request to use a
non-operating channel will be rejected.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add the following vendor commands and their vendor attributes for
spectral scan.
1) QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SPECTRAL_SCAN_GET_CONFIG
Get current values of spectral parameters.
2) QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SPECTRAL_SCAN_GET_DIAG_STATS
Get stats for spectral scan debug.
3) QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SPECTRAL_SCAN_GET_CAP_INFO
Get the spectral hardware capability.
4) QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SPECTRAL_SCAN_GET_STATUS
Get the current status of spectral scan.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some drivers may accept the remain-on-channel command, but instead of
indicating start event for remain-on-channel, just indicate that the
operation has been canceled immediately. This listen cancel from the
WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state ended up in discontinuation of further
WAIT_PEER_IDLE/WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state transitions. Hence, delay the
subsequent IDLE state by 100 ms.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_EXT_REPORT_TIME
and QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_EXT_MEASUREMENT_TIME to record
timestamp and duration for the last MAC counters. Some user layer
application is delay sensitive. It needs to know time stamp and
measurment duration for the counters.
Signed-off-by: Zhang Qian <zhangq@qti.qualcomm.com>
K and z can be derived already based on information available at the
time the PKEX Exchange Request is being processed, so move these there
from the PKEX Commit-Reveal Request processing since that matches the
DPP tech spec description close and allows PKEX exchange to be aborted
earlier if anything unexpected happens.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add limit on number of failed attempts that could have used PKEX code.
If the limit (5) is reached, drop the PKEX state (including the code)
and report this on the control interface to indicate that a new code
needs to be entered due to possible attack.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Clean up the pending PKEX exchange if Commit-Reveal Request processing
indicates a mismatch in the PKEX code. Previously, the this case was
silently ignored and the session was left in pending state that
prevented new PKEX exchanges from getting initated. Now, a new attempt
is allowed to be initiated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Number of places writing BIGNUM values with left-padding were open
coding this helper functionality unnecessarily.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Report mismatching finite cyclic group with PKEX Exchange Response using
STATUS_BAD_GROUP and provide more detailed error report over the control
interface on the peer device when this happens.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The optional channel information was removed from the discovery object
in the DPP tech spec, so no need to maintain this TODO note anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The previously used WLAN_REASON_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE (14) value as a
response to Authentication frame or (Re)Association Request frame is not
correct since the resp value is encoded in the Status Code (not Reason
Code) field. Status Code 14 is WLAN_STATUS_UNKNOWN_AUTH_TRANSACTION
which is really what this value would have meant in the response frames.
There is no Michael MIC failure status code, so have to use the generic
"Unspecified failure" (1) reason code for these cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up dpp_pkex_rx_commit_reveal_req() a bit and makes it easier
to add protocol testing functionality to PKEX exchange similarly to the
previously added DPP Authentication case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up dpp_pkex_rx_exchange_resp() a bit and makes it easier to
add protocol testing functionality to PKEX exchange similarly to the
previously added DPP Authentication case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up dpp_pkex_rx_exchange_req() a bit and makes it easier to
add protocol testing functionality to PKEX exchange similarly to the
previously added DPP Authentication case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Indicate to upper layers if PKEX Commit-Reveal Request frame AES-SIV
decryption fails. That is a likely sign of the PKEX code mismatch
between the devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Build breakage was introduced by commit
d8afdb210e ('Allow EAPOL-Key messages 1/4
and 3/4 to be retransmitted for testing') for some
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds without CONFIG_IEEE80211W=y.
Signed-off-by: Lior David <qca_liord@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides access to the Minimum/Maximum Transmit Power Capabilitie
fileds (the nominal minimum/maximum transmit power with which the STA
is capable of transmitting in the current channel; signed integer in
units of decibels relative to 1 mW).
Signed-off-by: bhagavathi perumal s <bperumal@qti.qualcomm.com>
Handle OWE DH exchange and key setup when processing the association
event from a driver that implements AP SME.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While most places using this should be for cases where the hw_features
functionality is required, there seem to be some paths that are getting
exposed in new OWE related operations where that might not be the case.
Add explicit NULL pointer checks to avoid dereferencing the pointer if
it is not set when operating with driver wrappers that do not provide
sufficient information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Normally, WNM-Sleep Mode exit with management frame protection
negotiated would result in the current GTK/IGTK getting added into the
WNM-Sleep Mode Response frame. Some station implementations may have a
vulnerability that results in GTK/IGTK reinstallation based on this
frame being replayed. Add a new hostapd configuration parameter that can
be used to disable that behavior and use EAPOL-Key frames for GTK/IGTK
update instead. This would likely be only used with
wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1 that enables a workaround for similar
issues with EAPOL-Key. This is related to station side vulnerabilities
CVE-2017-13087 and CVE-2017-13088. To enable this AP-side workaround,
set wnm_sleep_mode_no_keys=1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When strict group rekeying is in effect, every station that leaves will
cause a rekeying to happen 0.5 s after leaving. However, if a lot of
stations join/leave, the previous code could postpone this rekeying
forever, since it always re-registers the handling with a 0.5 s timeout.
Use eloop_deplete_timeout() to address that, only registering the
timeout from scratch if it wasn't pending.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
In order to test the WoWLAN GTK rekeying KRACK mitigation, add a
REKEY_GTK hostapd control interface command that can be used at certain
points of the test.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Allow the Initiator to request a different channel to be used for DPP
Authentication and DPP Configuration exchanges. This commit adds support
for this in wpa_supplicant with the optional neg_freq=<freq in MHz>
parameter in DPP_AUTH_INIT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Process Authentication Confirm with the two failure cases defined in the
spec: STATUS_NOT_COMPATIBLE and STATUS_AUTH_FAILURE. This verifies the
{R-nonce}k2 part and reports more detailed failure reason if the message
is valid.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If Authentication Response processing fails due to R-capab
incompatibility or R-auth mismatch, send Authentication Confirm with
error status.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the dpp_test mechanism to allow I-nonce, R-capab, R-auth,
and I-auth values in Authentication Response/Confirm to use incorrect
values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, Initiator decided whether to use mutual authentication on
its own based on having own and peer bootstrapping info. This prevented
Responder from selecting not to use mutual authentication in such a
case. Fix this by allowed Initiator to fall back to non-mutual
authentication based on Responder choice if the bootstrapping mechanism
allows this (PKEX does not; it mandates use of mutual authentication).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is useful for protocol testing purposes and UI needs to display
more detailed information about DPP exchanges.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the dpp_test mechanism to allow each of the required
attributes in Authentication Confirm to be omitted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is useful for protocol testing purposes and UI needs to display
more detailed information about DPP exchanges.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the dpp_test mechanism to allow each of the required
attributes in Authentication Response to be omitted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up old dpp_auth_build_resp() (now dpp_auth_build_resp_ok())
a bit by separating initialization steps for a DPP authentication
session from the code needed to build the frame. This allows
dpp_auth_build_resp_status() to share the helper function instead of
having to maintain a duplicated message construction implementation. In
addition, this makes it easier to remove some of the attributes for
protocol testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the dpp_test mechanism to allow each of the required
attributes in Authentication Request to be omitted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up dpp_auth_init() a bit by separating initialization steps
for a DPP authentication session from the code needed to build the
frame. In addition, this makes it easier to remove some of the
attributes for protocol testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is helpful for testing purposes and also for upper layer components
that may want to show more detailed progress through a DPP exchange.
Both the DPP-TX and DPP-TX-STATUS events are provided.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is helpful for testing purposes and also for upper layer components
that may want to show more detailed progress through a DPP exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Now that dpp_check_attrs() takes care of verifying that no attributes
are after the Wrapped Data attribute, the duplicated checks in hostapd
and wpa_supplicant side of the implementation can be removed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a generic mechanism for configuring the DPP implementation to behave
in particular different (mostly incorrect) ways for protocol testing
purposes. The new dpp_test parameter can be set to a non-zero integer to
indicate a specific behavior. This is only available in
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds.
This commit include cases for an extra attribute being added after the
Wrapped Data attribute and Initiator/Responder capabilities having an
unexpected zero capability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While using an external RADIUS server SUCCESS messages were not being
sent (internal was fine). Also add event messages for other states that
others might find useful, and consistency between the two.
Signed-off-by: Michael Baird <Michael.Baird@ecs.vuw.ac.nz>
Build breakage was introduced by commit
16579769ff ('Add testing functionality for
resetting PN/IPN for configured keys') for some CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y
builds.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The hostapd bss_transition parameter was previously used to control
advertisement of BSS Transition Management support, but it was not used
when processing BSS Transition Management Query/Response frames. Add an
explicit check during frame processing as well so that any misbehaving
station is ignored. In addition to bss_transition=1, allow mbo=1 to be
used to mark the functionality enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The hostapd wnm_sleep_mode parameter was previously used to control
advertisement of WNM-Sleep Mode support, but it was not used when
processing a request to use WNM-Sleep Mode. Add an explicit check during
request processing as well so that any misbehaving station is ignored.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows hostapd testing functionality to be forced to send out a
plaintext EAPOL-Key frame with the RESEND_* command. That can be useful
in seeing how the station behaves if an unencrypted EAPOL frame is
received when TK is already configured.
This is not really perfect since there is no convenient way of sending
out a single unencrypted frame in the current nl80211 design. The
monitor interface could likely still do this, but that's not really
supposed to be used anymore. For now, clear and restore TK during this
operation. The restore part is not really working correctly, though,
since it ends up clearing the TSC value on the AP side and that shows up
as replay protection issues on the station. Anyway, this is sufficient
to generate sniffer captures to analyze station behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
After an initial connection certain connection parameters may be
updated. It may be necessary to send these parameters to drivers since
these will be used in driver-initiated roaming cases. This commit
defines the driver_ops call for this and implements the needed
functionality for the nl80211 driver interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add additional attributes to specify the PMK, PMKID, and the ERP next
sequence number to the vendor subcommand
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_KEY_MGMT_ROAM_AUTH. These are needed in case
of an offloaded FILS roaming.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes a corner case where RSN pre-authentication candidate from
scan results was ignored if the station was associated with that BSS
just before running the new scan for the connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows a more accurate scan result age to be fetched than the one
available through NL80211_BSS_SEEN_MS_AGO.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Verify that TK, KCK, and KEK lengths are set to consistent values within
struct wpa_ptk before using them in supplicant. This is an additional
layer of protection against unexpected states.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds a new hostapd configuration parameter
wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1 that can be used to disable
retransmission of EAPOL-Key frames that are used to install
keys (EAPOL-Key message 3/4 and group message 1/2). This is
similar to setting wpa_group_update_count=1 and
wpa_pairwise_update_count=1, but with no impact to message 1/4
retries and with extended timeout for messages 4/4 and group
message 2/2 to avoid causing issues with stations that may use
aggressive power saving have very long time in replying to the
EAPOL-Key messages.
This option can be used to work around key reinstallation attacks
on the station (supplicant) side in cases those station devices
cannot be updated for some reason. By removing the
retransmissions the attacker cannot cause key reinstallation with
a delayed frame transmission. This is related to the station side
vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13077, CVE-2017-13078, CVE-2017-13079,
CVE-2017-13080, and CVE-2017-13081.
This workaround might cause interoperability issues and reduced
robustness of key negotiation especially in environments with
heavy traffic load due to the number of attempts to perform the
key exchange is reduced significantly. As such, this workaround
is disabled by default (unless overridden in build
configuration). To enable this, set the parameter to 1.
It is also possible to enable this in the build by default by
adding the following to the build configuration:
CFLAGS += -DDEFAULT_WPA_DISABLE_EAPOL_KEY_RETRIES=1
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd control interface commands "RESEND_M1 <addr>" and
"RESEND_M3 <addr>" can be used to request a retransmission of the 4-Way
Handshake messages 1/4 and 3/4 witht he same or modified ANonce (in M1).
This functionality is for testing purposes and included only in builds
with CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd control interface command "RESEND_GROUP_M1 <addr>" can
be used to request a retransmission of the Group Key Handshake message
1/2 for the current GTK.
This functionality is for testing purposes and included only in builds
with CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to test replay protection. The "RESET_PN" command in
wpa_supplicant and "RESET_PN <addr>" command in hostapd resets the local
counters to zero for the last configured key. For hostapd, the address
parameter specifies which STA this operation is for or selects GTK
("ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff") or IGTK ("ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff IGTK").
This functionality is for testing purposes and included only in builds
with CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of setting the default PMK length for the cleared PMK, set the
length to 0 and explicitly check for this when deriving PTK to avoid
unexpected key derivation with an all-zeroes key should it be possible
to somehow trigger PTK derivation to happen before PMK derivation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to understand the cases where PMK gets configured
based on information from upper layer call (e.g., a PSK).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently, reinstallations of the PTK are prevented by (1) assuring the
same TPTK is only set once as the PTK, and (2) that one particular PTK
is only installed once. This patch makes it more explicit that point (1)
is required to prevent key reinstallations. At the same time, this patch
hardens wpa_supplicant such that future changes do not accidentally
break this property.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This was originally added to allow the IEEE 802.11 protocol to be
tested, but there are no known fully functional implementations based on
this nor any known deployments of PeerKey functionality. Furthermore,
PeerKey design in the IEEE Std 802.11-2016 standard has already been
marked as obsolete for DLS and it is being considered for complete
removal in REVmd.
This implementation did not really work, so it could not have been used
in practice. For example, key configuration was using incorrect
algorithm values (WPA_CIPHER_* instead of WPA_ALG_*) which resulted in
mapping to an invalid WPA_ALG_* value for the actual driver operation.
As such, the derived key could not have been successfully set for the
link.
Since there are bugs in this implementation and there does not seem to
be any future for the PeerKey design with DLS (TDLS being the future for
DLS), the best approach is to simply delete all this code to simplify
the EAPOL-Key handling design and to get rid of any potential issues if
these code paths were accidentially reachable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver is expected to not report a second association event without
the station having explicitly request a new association. As such, this
case should not be reachable. However, since reconfiguring the same
pairwise or group keys to the driver could result in nonce reuse issues,
be extra careful here and do an additional state check to avoid this
even if the local driver ends up somehow accepting an unexpected
(Re)Association Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous implementation ended up starting a new EAPOL-Key 4-way
handshake if the STA were to attempt to perform another association.
This resulted in immediate disconnection since the PTK was not ready for
configuring FILS TK at the point when EAPOL-Key msg 1/4 is sent out.
This is better than alloing the association to continue with the same TK
reconfigured, but not really ideal.
Address this potential sequence by not starting a new 4-way handshake on
the additional association attempt. Instead, allow the association to
complete, but do so without reconfiguring the TK to avoid potential
issues with PN reuse with the same TK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows ext_mgmt_frame_handling=1 cases with hostapd to process TX
status events based on external processing. This is useful for increased
test coverage of management frame processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver is expected to not report a second association event without
the station having explicitly request a new association. As such, this
case should not be reachable. However, since reconfiguring the same
pairwise or group keys to the driver could result in nonce reuse issues,
be extra careful here and do an additional state check to avoid this
even if the local driver ends up somehow accepting an unexpected
Reassociation Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not try to reconfigure the same TPK-TK to the driver after it has
been successfully configured. This is an explicit check to avoid issues
related to resetting the TX/RX packet number. There was already a check
for this for TPK M2 (retries of that message are ignored completely), so
that behavior does not get modified.
For TPK M3, the TPK-TK could have been reconfigured, but that was
followed by immediate teardown of the link due to an issue in updating
the STA entry. Furthermore, for TDLS with any real security (i.e.,
ignoring open/WEP), the TPK message exchange is protected on the AP path
and simple replay attacks are not feasible.
As an additional corner case, make sure the local nonce gets updated if
the peer uses a very unlikely "random nonce" of all zeros.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Authenticator state machine path for PTK rekeying ended up bypassing
the AUTHENTICATION2 state where a new ANonce is generated when going
directly to the PTKSTART state since there is no need to try to
determine the PMK again in such a case. This is far from ideal since the
new PTK would depend on a new nonce only from the supplicant.
Fix this by generating a new ANonce when moving to the PTKSTART state
for the purpose of starting new 4-way handshake to rekey PTK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Properly track whether a PTK has already been installed to the driver
and the TK part cleared from memory. This prevents an attacker from
trying to trick the client into installing an all-zero TK.
This fixes the earlier fix in commit
ad00d64e7d ('Fix TK configuration to the
driver in EAPOL-Key 3/4 retry case') which did not take into account
possibility of an extra message 1/4 showing up between retries of
message 3/4.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
This extends the protection to track last configured GTK/IGTK value
separately from EAPOL-Key frames and WNM-Sleep Mode frames to cover a
corner case where these two different mechanisms may get used when the
GTK/IGTK has changed and tracking a single value is not sufficient to
detect a possible key reconfiguration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Track the current GTK and IGTK that is in use and when receiving a
(possibly retransmitted) Group Message 1 or WNM-Sleep Mode Response, do
not install the given key if it is already in use. This prevents an
attacker from trying to trick the client into resetting or lowering the
sequence counter associated to the group key.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
Do not reinstall TK to the driver during Reassociation Response frame
processing if the first attempt of setting the TK succeeded. This avoids
issues related to clearing the TX/RX PN that could result in reusing
same PN values for transmitted frames (e.g., due to CCM nonce reuse and
also hitting replay protection on the receiver) and accepting replayed
frames on RX side.
This issue was introduced by the commit
0e84c25434 ('FT: Fix PTK configuration in
authenticator') which allowed wpa_ft_install_ptk() to be called multiple
times with the same PTK. While the second configuration attempt is
needed with some drivers, it must be done only if the first attempt
failed.
Signed-off-by: Mathy Vanhoef <Mathy.Vanhoef@cs.kuleuven.be>
The new sae_password hostapd configuration parameter can now be used to
set the SAE password instead of the previously used wpa_passphrase
parameter. This allows shorter than 8 characters and longer than 63
characters long passwords to be used. In addition, this makes it
possible to configure a BSS with both WPA-PSK and SAE enabled to use
different passphrase/password based on which AKM is selected.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Memory allocation failures could have resulted in error paths that
dereference a NULL pointer or double-freeing memory. Fix this by
explicitly clearing the freed pointer and checking allocation results.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new hostapd configuration parameter owe_groups can be used to
specify a subset of the allowed DH groups as a space separated list of
group identifiers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds of wpa_supplicant to
override the OWE DH Parameters element in (Re)Association Request frames
with arbitrary data specified with the "VENDOR_ELEM_ADD 13 <IE>"
command. This is only for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This additional field was added to DPP Public Action frames in DPP tech
spec v0.2.3 to support cryptographic agility in the future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This matches the change in the DPP tech spec to make this less likely to
be confused with the shared secret z.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
